VA Signage

Design Guide

Veterans Health Administration Washington, DC 20420

December 2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 VA Signage Design Guide

Trim width of
paper to match
spine width of
binder pocket.
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Table of Contents

VA Signage Design Guide

• Introduction
• Acknowledgments
• Design Elements Section 1
• Need a New Sign Program Section 2
• Room Renumbering Section 3
• Exterior Signs Section 4
• Parking Structure Signs Section 5
• Parking Lot Signs Section 6
• Mandatory VA Policy Signs Section 7
• Code and Life Safety Signs Section 8
• Interior Signs Section 9
• "You Are Here" Maps and Directories Section 10
• Specialty Signs Section 11
• Cemetery Signs Section 12
• Glossary Section 13
• Appendix
• Emerging Technologies Appendix 1
• Sustainability Appendix 2
• Sign Index Appendix 3

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Introduction

This detailed program guide provides guidelines for the design of signs and sign
programs at VA facilities. It provides detail guidance for the development of a sign
system that assists VA customers as they approach the property, locate buildings
and functions within them.

Executive Summary This VA Signage Design Guide is a revision of the previous Design Guide pub-
lished in February 2005.

The revised design guide provides information and suggestions for the develop-
ment of sign programs at Veterans Affairs Facilities. The guide provides detailed
guidance for the development of a sign system that assists VA customers and staff
as they approach the property, locate buildings and services within the facility.

The Signage Design Guide includes revisions, which are the result of new sign
products, new sign manufacturing techniques and materials, regulatory changes,
expansion of VA facilities, procedural changes, and practical knowledge gained
from field experience. The revision of the guide has been a collaborative effort,
with comments and suggestions from VAMC and administration, and VACO pro-
gram officials including designers, fire and safety, security and law enforcement,
National Cemetery, and Veterans Benefits Administration.

The Guide has added new sections to assist VA facilities contemplating small room
renumbering programs or a complete revision of their existing signage systems.
The new sections educate program officials, designers, and planners on identifying
the need for a signage program and steps on interviewing and selecting a qualified
environmental graphic design firm. The sections also include an in-depth guide for
parking lots and parking structures signage.

The following are highlights of both the updated sections and the new sections that
have been added:

Updated Sections

• Proper/Improper use of VA Seal/Signature.

• Interior sign types and their specification, layout, construction, and installa-
tion guidelines. Along with new interior sign products and expanded sign type
families.
• Exterior sign types and their specifications, layout and construction. New sign
products, expanded sign type families and new illumination methods.
• Expanded exterior building mounted marquee signs (both illuminated and
non-illuminated).
• Mandatory VA policy signs containing specific text, layout, size, placement,
and location requirements that cannot be altered.
• Added Specialty Signs including construction site signs, construction site
safety sign, banners, memory boxes, freestanding sanitizing stations signs
plus others.
• An expanded Code and Life Safety signs section with additional pictorials for
installation of stairwell signs and those surrounding it.
• A greatly expanded wayfinding discussion in both the interior and exterior sign
sections
• Expanded campus/site plan design/layout options

12/2012
 Introduction

• Expanded “Need a Sign Program” chapter

• Expanded “Room & Floor Renumbering” chapter
• New signs added to Mandatory “VA Policy Signs by Directive”
• Additional options have been added to the monument sign design.
• Various topics within the sections were revised to include more information
and details.
• Within sections new subjects have been added on how to review shop draw-
ings and submittals, how to select the correct type of sign company.
• New colors for exterior and interior signs have been provided along with up-
dated colors for parking lot and parking structures.
• An expanded section discussing room renumbering and floor renumbering.
• Additional subjects that were revised include “Tips and Hints” and
“Construction and Assembly Details”.
New Sections

• A section on Your Are Here Maps and Directories.

• A section on Parking Lot Signs
• A section devoted to National Cemetery Signs.
• A glossary of terms used in the sign industry
• A new section titled, “Emerging Sign Technologies” provides an overview of
conceptual developments toward the use of new products and technology. The
section also discusses applications of new technologies.
The revised VA Signage Design Guide is a living document that will be periodi-
cally updated. When changes do occur, “Design Alerts” will be e-mailed with the
included changes.

The VA Signage Design Guide incorporates guidelines from ABAAS, ABA/ADA

and NFPA.

Lloyd H. Siegel, FAIA Associate, Director, Strategic Management Office

October 2012

12/2012
 Acknowledgments

This Program Guide for the Department of Veterans Affairs has involved work and input
from many departments, individuals and VA Medical Centers. The followinidentifies the
participants and acknowledges their contributions.
Department of Veterans
Affairs
Veterans Health Administration
Christa Fairchild Desiree Lee, LEED AP
Interior Designer Interior Designer
VAMC Huntington VAMC Kansas City

Keith Frost Katie Willis

Security Specialist / Team Leader Interior Designer
VA OSP / Office of Security VAMC Dallas
and Law Enforcement

David P. Klein, P.E.

Fire Protection Engineer
VA Central Office

Office of Construction & Facilities Management

Orest Burdiak Alejandra De La Torre
Principal Interior Designer Architect

Fei Chan (Linda), AIA Nancy Zivitz Sussman

Planner / Architect Management & Program Analyst

Veterans Benefits Administration

Samuel Gyulnazarian, AIA, IIDA, LEED BD+C®
Architect, Project Manager

National Cemetery Administration

Peggy Jensen
Architect / Project Manager

Design Consultants

KAL Architects

Rita Kalwani, AIA, NCARB, IIDA, LEED AP BD+C®

Principal, Project Manager
Jennifer Hanscome, CID, IIDA, LEED AP BD+C®
Senior Interior Designer
Mark Niese, AIA, CSI, CDT, ACIA, LEED AP BD+C®
Technical Support
Anne Blomberg, CID, LEED Green Associate®
Technical Support

Solsis LLC

Bill Englund Robin Eckert

Principal Environmental Graphic Designer
Fran Kalbfeld Mark Englund
Environmental Graphic Designer Environmental Graphic Designer
Sarah Braun
Environmental Graphic Designer

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Design
Elements

• Typography
• Letterspacing
• Logo Signature
• Seal
• Arrow
• ABA/ADA Specifications
• Colors
• Images and Patterns
• Languages
• Metric

12/2012 rev 08/01/2014

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Components Design Elements

The Department of Veterans Affairs signage system has been designed using a
selected group of common design elements and visual standards.

The design elements include the Department of Veterans Affairs logo signature
and seal, three versions (weight and style) of the Helvetica typeface and specifica-
tions for letter and word spacing. Visual standards include: colors, finishes, and let-
ter size in relation to viewing distance.

The design elements become the component building blocks upon which signs are
configured. The elements have been adopted to provide functional consistency in
signs for the Department of Veterans Affairs.

If specialized or unique sign applications require deviation from the signage guide,
contact the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs, Office of Construction & Facilities
Management for approval as required.

12/2012 Page 1-1-1

 Components Design Elements

Typography
Helvetica Bold is the standard
typeface for the VA Sign System
and will be used predominantly
throughout the sign program. Signs
identifying permanent rooms shall
be ABA compliant, to accommodate
the visually impaired (refer to ABA
sections). All non-ABA signs are to
maintain an upper and lower case
(Initial Caps) format.

The secondary language of a

multilingual sign shall be Helvetica
Regular.

Overhead signs shall be Helvetica

Bold Condensed.

Letterspacing
Normal letter spacing is utilized
when the readability ratio factor Normal Spacing
(capital letter height in inches
to maximum readable viewing
distance in feet) is 1:25 for a word
using upper and lower case letters.
Word spacing shall be equivalent to
the width of a lower case “v”.

ABA letters should be spaced so

that tactile readers can feel where
one letter ends and the next begins.
Braille needs to be spaced so the
reader can feel where one dot ends
and the next dot begins (refer to ABA
sections).

Normal letter spacing should not

be used when letter forms are to be
illuminated as light bleed causes
letters to fuse together visually.

Distance letter spacing shall be

utilized when the copy content is
intended for readability at greater
viewing distances than normal letter
spacing allows. The readability ratio
factor is 1:40. Distance letter spacing
shall be used for all exterior and
illuminated signs.

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-2

 Components Design Elements

Mm
Interline Spacing
Interline spacing will generally be x
noted on sign type drawings. As a
1/2 x
Mm
rule, line spacing shall be no less
than 1/2 the height of the upper
case letter form.

Paragraph Spacing

Mm
Paragraph spacing will generally
be noted on sign type drawings. As
a rule, paragraph spacing shall be
x
no less than the height of the upper
case letter form.

x
Mm
Mm
Mm
Alignment
A flush upper left copy format shall
be the general rule though certain
x
exceptions shall be noted. *
As a rule, all copy placed on inserts,
changeable directional modules,
listing strips, overhead panels, and
x
*

changeable exterior panels shall be

vertically centered, (equal margins
top and bottom) Graphic symbols
used in square format shall be
Text Line One
centered on four sides.
Text Line Two

X - Dimensions vary per sign type.

See Sign Type Drawings for exact dimensions

12/2012 Page 1-1-3

 Components Design Elements

Logo Signature
The VA has developed a new logo/
signature for use in signage. You
will note that the name is also now
presented differently.

The new logo and name signature

replaces the old logo and name
presentation effective immediately.

The old logo may remain in use in

and on existing signs, but all new
signs shall incorporate the new
logo/ signature.

Adjacent are its application in a

horizontal format and a vertical
format. These are the only formats
to use for signs. Do not use the

U.S. Department
format/art from the VA Graphic
Standards that incorporate the VA
seal.

of Veterans Affairs
The master art for the new
logo/signature for signage is
available as an electronic file, for
downloading, in the Technical
Information Library.

NOTE: The master art and

typography shall not be altered.
The font, the size relationship
between the elements, and the
letter spacing for the “VA” and “U.S.
Department of Veterans Affairs”
name, shall remain as presented
in the master art. The ruled line is
considered a part of the master art
and shall not be moved or deleted.

New VA Blue New VA Blue

The VA has selected Pantone 541
as the new standard color. The
CMYK values are as follows:
C: 100 M: 60 Y: 0 K: 40
Pantone 541
C: 100 M:60 Y:0 K:40

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-4

 Components Design Elements

Seal
The illustrated VA Seal is new.

There are specific requirements

regarding its use and reproduction
in both the full color version and
one color version. Consult the VA
Graphic Standards for complete
details regarding the seal.

NOTE: In regard to signage, the

seal is NOT to be used. It is not to
be altered, stylized or treated as an
accent element in signs.

It’s use remains as before, to be

displayed within a buildings entry
or lobby and reproduced per the
specifications and art exhibited in
the VA Graphic Standards.

Arrow
Illustrations show the prescribed
arrow for use in the VA sign
program.

The arrow is always centered

within a square field.

POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3

POSITION 4 POSITION 5

Arrow Alignment with Text

The arrow is always positioned in
such a manner that it is centered in
relationship to the capital letter that
it precedes. The standard position
for arrows, in relationship to text, is
1/3" Cap Height
either on the left of the first line of
text or immediately above the first
line of text.
EQ.

Text Line
On signs with numerous
destinations, a single arrow will be
1.5 x

placed adjacent to the first line of

x

text to identify the direction for all

destinations grouped together.
EQ.

The arrow size is one and one half

(1 1/2) times the capital letter
height.
Text Line

12/2012 Page 1-1-5

 ADA Design Elements

Architectural Barriers Act

Tactile Sign Specifications
3/8" Min 1/8" Min 3/8" Min
Character Specifications clear space Letter Spacing clear space
Characters shall be sans serif, all
capitals, and shall not be italic,
3/8" Min
bold, script or highly decorative. clear space

Characters and Braille shall be in a

horizontal format. Character height
2" Max height
5/8” Min height
CLEAN

Baseline Spacing
shall be 5/8" minimum and 2"

UTILITY
maximum, depending on viewing
distance (see Table 703.5.5 in "ABA
Accessibility standards for federal 3/8" Min
clear space
facilities").
Approx 1/4" Clean Utility
Character stroke thickness of the 3/8" Min
uppercase letter “I” shall be 15% clear space
Front View Copy
maximum of the height of the
character.
Braille
Character spacing to be 1/8"
minimum and four times the
character stroke width maximum.

Line spacing to be 135% minimum

and 170% maximum of the letter 3/8" Min 1/8" Min 3/8" Min
height. clear space Letter Spacing clear space

3/8" Min
Characters shall be separated from
clear space
raised borders and decorative

A-2578
elements by 3/8" minimum
2" Max height
5/8” Min height
Characters shall be raised 1/32"
minimum above their background. 3/8" Min
clear space
Approx 1/4" A-2578
Characters to be used shall be
3/8" Min
selected from styles where the width clear space
of the uppercase letter “O” is 55% Front View Copy
minimum and 110% maximum based Braille
on the height of the uppercase letter
“I”.

Pictograms
Pictograms shall have a field height
of 6". Characters and Braille shall
not be located within the pictogram
field. Pictogram text descriptions
to be located directly below the
pictogram field.

Finish & Contrast

Characters and their background to 6"
have a non-glare finish. Characters
shall contrast with their background
with either light lettering on a dark
background or dark letters on a
light background.

General
Where both visual and tactile
characters are required, either one
sign with both visual and tactile
lettering or two separate signs, one
with visual, one with tactile lettering
shall be provided.

Raised letters to be read by touch

should not have sharp or abrasive
edges.

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-6

 ADA Design Elements

Architectural Barriers Act

Tactile Sign Specification .100 .300
Braille
Shall be contracted, (Grade 2).
Raised dot
See measurements shown at right.
.100
Braille dots shall have a domed or No raised dot
rounded shape.
.400
The indication of an uppercase
letter or letters shall only be used Individual cell
.063
before the first word of sentences,
proper nouns and names, Individual
letters of the alphabet, initials, and
Blank cell .025
acronyms.
between words
Braille shall be positioned below Braille Specifications Raised Braille
the corresponding text. If text is
multi-lined, Braille shall be placed
below the entire text. Braille shall
be separated 3/8" minimum from
any other tactile letters and 3/8"
from raised borders.

Exception
Braille provided on elevator car
controls shall be separated by
3/16" minimum and shall be located
either directly below or adjacent
to the corresponding raised letters 18" wide available
and symbols. area for
Plan View
tactile signage
Location
Where a tactile sign is provided at
a door the sign shall be located
alongside the door at the latch side.
Where a tactile sign is provided at
double doors with one active leaf
the sign shall be located on the
inactive leaf. With two active leafs
the sign shall be located to the
right of the right hand door. Where
there is no wall space at the latch
side of a single door or at the right
side of double doors, signs shall
be located on the nearest adjacent
wall. Signs containing Tactile
AREA OF
characters shall be located so that
a clear floor space 18" minimum
AREA OF
REFUGE
area of refuge
REFUGE
area of refuge
by 18" minimum centered on the
Tactile characters is proposed
beyond the arc of any door swing
between the closed position and 40 48" 60"
degrees open position. Min Max

Tactile lettering on signs shall be

located 48" minimum above the
finish floor or ground surface,
measured from the baseline of the
lowest tactile character and 60"
maximum above the finish floor
or ground surface, measured from Elevation
the baseline of the highest tactile
character.

12/2012 Page 1-1-7

 ADA Design Elements

Arcitectural Barriers Act

Requirements
4" (102 mm)
Cane Sweep
Objects with leading edges more
than 27 inches (686 mm) and not
more than 80 inches (2129 mm)
above the finish floor or ground
may protrude 4 inches (102 mm)
maximum horizontally into the
circulation path.

EXCEPTION: Handrails shall be

permitted to protrude 4 1/2 inches
(114 mm) maximum.

Protrusion Limits
When a cane is used and the
element is in the detectable range,
it gives a person sufficient time
to detect the element with the
cane before there is body contact.
Elements located on circulation
paths, including operable elements,
must comply with requirements for
protruding objects. For example,
awnings and their supporting
structures cannot reduce the
minimum required vertical
clearance. Similarly, casement
windows, when open, cannot
encroach more than 4 inches (102
mm) into circulation paths above 27
inches (686 mm). 4" 4"
(102 mm) (102 mm)

Post Mounted 80"

Protruding Objects (2029 mm)
Free-standing objects mounted
on posts or pylons shall overhang 27"
circulation paths 12 inches (305 (686 mm)
mm) maximum when located 27 4" (102 mm) 4" (102 mm)
inches (686 mm) minimum and
80 inches (2129 mm) maximum
above the finish floor or ground.
Where a sign or other obstruction is
mounted between posts or pylons
and the clear distance between the
posts or pylons is greater than 12
inches (305 mm), the lowest edge
of such sign or obstruction shall
be 27 inches (686 mm) maximum
or 80 inches (2129 mm) minimum
above the finish floor or ground.

EXCEPTION: The sloping portions of

handrails serving stairs and ramps
shall not be required to comply. 27"
(686 mm) 4" (102 mm)

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-8

 Colors Design Elements

Sign Colors
The chart and accompanying
illustrations provide a listing of sign U.S. Department
colors that allow a medical center Text of Veterans Affairs
to coordinate an interior or exterior
sign program to the architectural
colors and finishes of the buildings Background
on the campus.

The color options listed have been

Accent
selected because they provide
contrast between typography and
the sign background; the contrast
shall be light on dark or dark on light.

Night and day light conditions for

exterior signs can vary, therefore,
readability should be field verified
with actual color samples.

High contrast for readability is equally

important for interior signs, especially
for the elderly and vision impaired.
Light background colors require black
or dark gray text and deep or dark
colors require white text.

If a facility deviates from the

identified family of colors, sufficient
contrast between the typography and
sign background under all lighting
situations shall be maintained. U.S. Department
Text of Veterans Affairs
Placement, type of light fixture,
sodium and halide lights, warm
and cool fluorescent lights can also
change colors and affect contrast, so
this needs to be taken into account.
Background
Some colors listed can be used
for both interior and exterior
applications and are so indicated.
There are however certain colors
that should not be used for interior Posts
or exterior signs because of their
unsuitability or because they are only
for special applications.

ABA Sign Colors

Generally, ABA related signage
shall consist of white text and/or
figures on a blue background, blue
shall be equal to color no. 15090 in
Federal Standard 59513; white is
not defined in the ABA standards.
VA may approve other colors
to complement decor or unique
design.

12/2012 Page 1-1-9

 Colors Design Elements

For exterior signs use the chart at Exterior Sign Background Colors
right to select a background color
and a type color.
Color Text
Color Description Color Matthews # Azko Nobel #
The paint colors listed are acrylic Ref #
polyurethne paint systems
manufactured by the following two B1 Drake White MP05732 SIGNM05732
companies. These are commonly
used in the sign industry: B2 Wells Fargo Black White MP26309 SIGNM26309

Matthews Paint B3 Lime Peel White MP12444 SIGNM12444

760 Pittsburg Drive
Delaware, OH 43015 B4 Marinated Olive White MP15975 SIGNM15975
www.matthewspaint.com
B5 Bear Creek White MP07050 SIGNM07050
Akzo Nobel
5555 Spaulding Drive B6 Kaffe Tan White MP03290 SIGNM03290
Norcross, GA 30092
www.akzonobel.com
B7 Indian Throne Blue White MP10261 SIGNM10261
Note: Always obtain color samples
from the paint company. Colors B8 Djbouti Flag Blue White MP10273 SIGNM10273
shown are for representational
purposes only. The actual paint B9 Mudstone White MP00547 SIGNM00547
colors may vary significantly from
the corresponding swatches B10 Brown County White MP04991 SIGNM04991
indicated in this document. Colors
will appear differently when viewed B11 Blue News White MP05040 SIGNM05040
on different computer monitors and/
or printed from different printers. B13 Claret Jug White MP10658 SIGNM10658
For a true color sample, it is best
to obtain an actual paint sample of B14 Asgard Wall White MP05480 SIGNM05480
the desired color.
B16 Handicapped Blue White MP26511 SIGNM26511
All traffic sign faces should use the
prescribed colors as listed in the B17 Red (OSHA) White MP09251 SIGNM09251
Manual for Uniform Traffic Control
Devices. New VA Blue MP09829
B18 White SIGNM09144
All OSHA Safety Colors are to meet
B19 Yellow (OSHA) Black MP09144 SIGNM09829
ANSI specification Z53.1/OSHA.
Black,
B20 White Red, Purple MP32071 SIGNM32071

B19 - White can be paint, white opaque vinyl application or translucent white vinyl application for
illuminated signs

Additional Colors for Trims, Accents, Posts & Brackets

A1 Dark Bronze Anodized A4 Polished Aluminum
A2 Black A5 Satin Aluminum
A3 Clear Anodized Aluminum

B17 Background color U.S. Department B13 Background color

of Veterans Affairs
B20 Text color Baltimore VA Medical Center B20 Text color
VA Maryland Health Care System

A5 Trim color
VA Capitol Health Care Network

A5 Trim color

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-10

 Colors Design Elements

For parking garage signs, vinyl colors

will be applied to either white or Parking Structure & Parking Lot Sign Colors
one of the other paint colors listed
in the chart at right. The colors and
their respective numbers listed in the Paint Colors Vinyl Text Colors
chart.
Color Color Matthews Azko
The paint colors listed are acrylic Ref # Description Paint # Nobel # 3M # Avery #
polyurethne paint systems
manufactured by the following two Purple Lavender
companies: B30 Purple Print MP02112 SIGNM02112
7725-48 A9475-0
Matthews Paint
Tomato Red Tomato Red
760 Pittsburg Drive B31 Gravity Tractor MP10844 SIGNM10844
Delaware, OH 43015 7725-13 A9325-0
www.matthewspaint.com
Wells Fargo Black Black
B32 MP26309 SIGNM26309
Akzo Nobel Black 7725-22 A9090-0
5555 Spaulding Drive
Norcross, GA 30092 Saddle Brown Cocoa
B33 Modena Mud MP00607 SIGNM00607
www.akzonobel.com 7725-139 A9278-0
The vinyl colors listed are
B34 Sailboat Blue MP02160 SIGNM02160 Vivid Blue Vivid Blue
premium high performance vinyls 7725-17 A9570-0
manufactured by the following two
companies: Apple Green Apple Green
B35 Anole Green MP13427 SIGNM13427
Avery Dennison Graphics and
7725-196 A9660-0
Reflective Products Division
Light Orange Orange
250 Chester Street, Building 6 B36 Antartica Orange MP01229 SIGNM01229
Painesville, Ohio 44077 7725-54 A9160-0

3M Graphics Market Center Teal Real Teal

3M Center, Bld 2002-12-E-04
B38 Aqua Riva MP14879 SIGNM14879 7725-96 A9615-0
St. Paul, MN 55144
Magenta Magenta
Note: Always obtain color samples B39 Rose Essence MP15170 SIGNM15170
7725-103 A9411-0
from the paint company. Colors
shown are for representational White White
purposes only. The actual paint B40 White Wonder MP32071 SIGNM32071
7725-10 A9005-0
colors may vary significantly from
the corresponding swatches
Sunflower Med. Yellow
indicated in this document. Colors B41 Shell Oil MP05585 SIGNM05585 7725-25 A9130-0
will appear differently when viewed
on different computer monitors and/
or printed from different printers.
For a true color sample, it is best
to obtain an actual paint sample of Additional Colors for Trims, Accents, Posts & Brackets
the desired color.
A1 Dark Bronze Anodized A4 Polished Aluminum

A2 Black A5 Satin Aluminum

A3 Clear Anodized Aluminum

P33 Paint background color

P34 Paint background color
P40 Vinyl text color Elevators
P34 Vinyl text color
A5 Trim Color P40 Vinyl text color

5 P40 Paint background color

Level

12/2012 Page 1-1-11

 Colors Design Elements

Accent

Text 2A244
2A244
Background

Bracket

Background Cardiac
Text
Intervention
Unit

Text

Background
Fire
Door
Keep closed
at all times.

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-12

 Colors Design Elements

For interior signs use the chart to the

right to select a background color
Interior Sign Background Colors
and a type color.
Color Text
Color Description Color Matthews # Azko Nobel #
The paint colors listed are acrylic Ref #
polyurethne paint systems
manufactured by the following two B1 Drake White MP05732 SIGNM05732
companies:
B2 Wells Fargo Black White MP26309 SIGNM26309
Matthews Paint
760 Pittsburg Drive
B3 Lime Peel White MP12444 SIGNM12444
Delaware, OH 43015 B8 Djibouti Flag Blue White MP10273 SIGNM10273
www.matthewspaint.com
B10 Brown County White MP04991 SIGNM04991
Akzo Nobel
5555 Spaulding Drive B28 Orange County White MP07869 SIGNM07869
Norcross, GA 30092
www.akzonobel.com B29 Spice Trader White MP02795 SIGNM02795
Note: Always obtain color samples
B31 Gloomy Gray White MP10124 SIGNM10124
from the paint company. Colors
B33 Fresh Fields White MP11532 SIGNM11532
shown are for representational
purposes only. The actual paint B34 Plum Crazy White MP04400 SIGNM04400
colors may vary significantly from
the corresponding swatches B35 Antwerp Blue White MP03362 SIGNM03362
indicated in this document. Colors
will appear differently when viewed B16 Handicapped Blue White MP26511 SIGNM26511
on different computer monitors and/
or printed from different printers. B17 Red (OSHA) White MP09251 SIGNM09251
For a true color sample, it is best
to obtain an actual paint sample of B18 New VA Blue White MP09144 SIGNM09144
the desired color.
B30 Spruce Pine Black MP13106 SIGNM13106
B32 Baby Boy Blue Black MP00344 SIGNM00344
B21 Garbo Silver Black MP02650 SIGNM02650
B22 Clintonite Green Black MP14762 SIGNM14762
B23 Old Copper Roof Black MP03397 SIGNM03397
B24 Foie Gras Black MP04685 SIGNM04685
B25 Winter Slush Black MP04982 SIGNM04982
B26 Toasty Gold Black MP05322 SIGNM05322
B27 Corn Silk Black MP11392 SIGNM11392
B19 Yellow (OSHA) Black MP09829 SIGNM09829
Black,
B20 White MP32071 SIGNM32071
Red, Purple

Additional Colors for Trims, Accents, Posts & Brackets

A1 Dark Bronze Anodized A4 Polished Aluminum
A2 Black A5 Satin Aluminum
A3 Clear Anodized Aluminum

B3 Background color

25286
25286
B20 Text color

B20 Text color

12/2012 Page 1-1-13

 Images Design Elements

Integration of Images and

Patterning with Signage
Visual iconography, such as images
and patterns, can be incorporated
into the design of both interior and
exterior signage systems. Their Receptionist
inclusion can add visual interest,
unify, or differentiate, signs related
to specific areas of a building
and/or campus. Imagery should RESTROOM
be thematically cohesive and Restroom

integrated in a consistent manner

Surgery
throughout the sign program.

Imagery can be cut from vinyl,

screened, painted, etched or applied
as a vinyl or laminated digital print.
Example shows possible use of a repeating pattern as visual texture, in this case the texture has
Imagery should be visually of
secondary importance to messaging been applied to separate substrate behind the sign panel.
and not distract or conflict with
readability of sign.

RESTROOM
Restroom

Receptionist Receptionist

Surgery Surgery

RESTROOM
Restroom

Example shows integration of photographic imagery. Example also illustrates the use different images
related to a common theme. This approach can be useful when implementing a sign system in a facility
where different areas of that facility have been assigned different color and material palettes.

Glass or Acrylic with either etched

graphic or application of translucent film to
simulate appearance of etched glass

Receptionist

RESTROOM
Restroom

Surgery

Example shows graphic as silhouetted images. This example illustrates a subtle approach to integration
of imagery/patterning

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-14

 Language Design Elements

Second Language
In facilities in the United States, Margin
the English text is listed above the
second language text. The cap

44544
height and interline spacing of the
second language text are half the
cap height and interline spacing
of the English text, unless noted
otherwise (see sign type drawings 44544
for specific dimensions).

In facilities in the Puerto Rico, the

Soiled Utility
Y X
Spanish text is listed above the
English text and the cap height and English
interline spacing of the English text Text
are half the cap height and interline
spacing of the Spanish text, unless 1/2 X
noted otherwise.

Suplidos Usados Second

Language
1/2 Y

Sign used in U.S Facility

Margin

44544
44544

Suplidos
Y X

Spanish
Text
Limpios
1/2 X

Clean Utility English

Text
1/2 Y

Sign used in Facility in Puerto Rico

12/2012 Page 1-1-15

 Metric Design Elements

Metric Nearest Nearest Nearest 1"=

The metric system is the preferred Inches 1 mm 5 mm 5 mm 25mm
system of measurement in (1/25") (1/5") (2/5") EXACTLY

accordance with the Metric 1/32"

1
Conversion Act of 1975, P.L. 94- 1/16"
168, as amended by Section 2
5164 of Omnibus Trade and 3/32" 2
Competitiveness Act of 1988, and 1/8" 3
Executive Order 12770.
3/16" 5
In accord with the Department of 1/4" 6
Veteran Affairs metric conversion
5/16"
plan, the sign system is preferably 8
to be constructed in metric, 3/8" 10
however, the English system can 7/16"
be used on VA projects, if it meets 11
the needs of a specific facility. 1/2"
13
The use of metric should not add 9/16" 14
cost to a project and “off the shelf”
metric sign systems are preferred. 5/8" 16
3/4" 19
The VA does not intend to impose
7/8" 22
rigid metric conversions on the
sign industry and will support sign 1" 25 25
manufacturers as their industry
converts to the metric standard. 11/4" 32 30
11/2" 38 40
For assistance in transition
13/4" 44 45
to metric, the drawings with
dimensions should be prepared 2" 51 50
showing direct metric English 21/4" 57 55
conversion. While typography is
generally referred to in the graphic 21/2" 64 65
industry by point sizes and the 23/4" 70 70
sign industry in inches, the VA sign
program is showing text layouts 3" 76 75
developed in inches and then 31/4" 83 85
directly converted to metric. It is
preferred, however, that metric 31/2" 89 90
dimensions be rounded up to 33/4" 95 95
the nearest 1 mm up to 1 inch; 5 102 100 100
4" 100
mm up to 4 inches; and, above
4 inches rounded down to the 5" 127 125 130 125
nearest 25 mm. 6" 152 150 150 150

The adjacent conversion chart 7" 178 180 180 175

should provide assistance in 8" 203 205 200 200
determining conversions from
9" 229 230 230 225
inches to millimeters.
10" 254 255 250 250
For further information on the
11" 279 280 280 275
conversion to metric, contact the
Department of Veteran Affairs, 1'-0" 305 305 300 300
Office of Construction & Facilities 2'-0" 610 610 610 600
Management.
3'-0" 915 910 900
4'-0" 1220 1220 1200
5'-0" 1525 1520 1500
6'-0" 1830 1830 1800
7'-0" 2135 2130 2100
8'-0" 2440 2440 2400
9'-0" 2745 2740 2700
10'-0" 3050 3050 3000
15'-0" 4570 4570 4500
20'-0" 6095 6100 6000

12/2012 rev 8/1/2014 Page 1-1-16

This page is intentionally left blank.
 Need a Sign
Program

• How to Know When

• Getting Help
• Project Process

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Evaluation Need a Sign Program

Every Building Needs That common understanding starts with the fact that today’s building codes require
a Sign Program certain life safety signs for building occupancy. In addition, signs are needed for
basic operational purposes, such as restroom signs.

Next, comes the need for labeling rooms. This allows for people to find rooms, its
occupants and services, have things delivered, and get repairs made. When a
building has more than one straight corridor the need for directional signs becomes
apparent. Add another floor(s) and additional types of life safety signs and floor
level designations are required.

So clearly every building needs signs. New buildings are easy because they can
start with a fresh new sign program tailored to the initial occupancy of the building
and to the requirements of the first users.

Older buildings, on the other hand, have existing signs, and unless the sign pro-
gram has been regularly updated with every building remodel, modification, and
change in informational use, the sign program is probably in need of replacement or
at a minimum, updating for code compliance.

Every Site Needs a Today’s building codes require certain exterior signs for building occupancy such as
Sign Program the identification of handicapped entrances and parking. Additionally, VA directives
require certain signs at the entry to the site and its buildings.

Next is the need for identifying buildings and entrances. This allows for people to
find occupants and services and have things delivered. When a site has more than
one building, directional signs become necessary. Add even more buildings, parking
lots and roads, and directional information to drivers and pedestrians, directional
signs become critically important for people to find their destination.

It is evident that every site needs exterior signs. New sites can start with a fresh
new sign program, however, this is typically not the case.

Most sites have been in use and have added and removed buildings over the
years, have relocated building entrances, and moved services from one building
to another. Unless the exterior sign program has been regularly updated, the sign
program may be in need of replacement.

The following are some probable indicators that a site and facility need a new exte-
rior sign program. Generally, the more of these that apply, the more pressing the
need.

• Is the exterior sign program older than 10 years?

• Do the exterior signs have rust showing through the paint?
• Is the name on the main site identification sign correct?
• Does the exterior sign program contain signs that are leaning or falling over?
• Have changes been made to parking lots? (use and location)
• Have buildings closed or changed use?
• Is the paint or lettering peeling off signs?
• Have signs been vandalized and not repaired, or repaired poorly?
• Does the exterior sign program refer to buildings that are closed?

12/2012 Page 2-1

 Evaluation Need a Sign Program

Does the facility need • Are exterior signs faded and streaked?
a new exterior sign
• Do visitors frequently ask for directions or become lost?
program?
• Are there plywood or temporary signs serving as directional or identification
(continued)
signs?
• Are exterior signs covered or hidden by landscaping or trees?
• Do the exterior signs refer to departments, entrances or services that are no
longer available or have been relocated?

How does age affect If the sign program is 3 to 5 years old and the signs have been maintained and cre-
the exterior sign ated or updated the necessary directional signs every time a department or service
program? is moved, the sign program can be considered reasonably current and will function
for many years to come.

If the sign program is 5 to 10 years old, more than likely the directional wayfinding
program has mistakes, missing information and misleading directional information.
During the 5 to 10 year period the paint finish on the signs is starting to show the
effect of weather aging.

Also, over a 10-year period there has probably been remolding or new construction
projects that have created orphaned signs or signs that are incorrectly labeling
buildings or services. Parking location and usage has also probably changed. And,
sign programs that are 10 years old have had different people working to maintain
them over the years.

At 15 years, a sign program has passed the threshold of being usable. Rust,
corrosion, peeling and severely faded paint mean the signs have now reached
point where they should be replaced like any other worn out or obsolete piece of
equipment.

Exterior sign programs that are over 20 years old are past the point of usefulness.
The physical condition of the signs is usually so bad they are actually “junk”. Other
aspects with a sign program at this age is the information conveyed is probably so
out of date that it provides little if any help to patients and visitors.

Does the facility need Following are probable indicators that the facility needs a new interior sign program.
a new exterior sign Generally, the more of these that apply to the buildings, the more pressing the need
program? for a replacement sign program.

• Is the sign program older than 15 years?

• Does staff constantly get asked for directions from confused or lost patients
and visitors?
• Is the information counter overwhelmed with requests for directions?
• Have code and life safety signs been upgraded in the last 5 years?
• Are there home made or paper signs identifying rooms or functioning as direc-
tional signs?
• Are directional signs and graphics still directing people to departments that no
longer exist or have moved?
• Are there interior signs in different colors, or materials, at the same door?

12/2012 Page 2-2

 Evaluation Need a Sign Program

Does the facility need • At the same door, are interior signs different types?
a new interior sign
• Are room number signs mounted on the door or on the door frame above the
program?
door?
(continued)
• Are signs mounted in the correct location?
• Are interior signs taped to the wall?
• Has remodeling or new construction changed the circulation routes in the
building?
• Are there color stripes in the floor or on the wall that no longer lead to desig-
nated departments?
• Has the use of the rooms in building changed?
• Is the room numbering system confusing and are numbers being used out of
sequence?
• Has there been a major relocation of services within the medical center?
• Are there repeated requests for updated wayfinding signs?
• At department entrances, are there 3 or 4 signs describing the occupant?

How does age affect If the sign program is 5 years old and the signs have been properly maintained
the interior sign and necessary directional signs have been updated every time a department has
program? moved, the sign program can be considered reasonably current and will function for
many years to come.

If the sign program is 10 years old, more than likely the directional wayfinding
program has mistakes, missing information and misleading directional information.
Also, over a 10-year period there have probably been remodelling projects that have
created orphaned signs or signs that are incorrectly labeling rooms or services.

Sign programs that are 10 years old may have had different people working to
maintain them over the years. As different individuals add or delete items to an
existing sign program in an uncoordinated fashion, the logic and/or cohesive struc-
ture of that sign program becomes compromised. As a result, the sign program can
become confusing and difficult for visitors to understand.

At 15 years a sign program has now past the threshold of being usable.

By now the original sign program is very likely so disconnected from what was origi-
nally implemented that there is no common thread of communication, look, finishes,
placement or information.

Sign programs that are over 20 years old are totally broken, dysfunctional and
should be replaced like any other obsolete piece of equipment.

What does a new sign Implementing a new sign program has a positive impact on every individual that
program bring to a uses the facility, whether it is a patient, visitor or employee.
facility?
These are just a few of the things achieved.

• Improved patient satisfaction.

• Improved image of the VA to the patients and visitors.

12/2012 Page 2-3

 Evaluation Need a Sign Program

• Improved employee morale.

• Improved professional image in the medical community.
• Reduced staff time in providing directions to patients and visitors.
• Modernized appearance to older buildings.

Does the facility need Following are some probable indicators that a building needs to have the rooms
room renumbering? renumbered and implement a new interior room identification sign program.

• Is the sign program older than 15 years?

• Has there been major remodeling with in the building?
• Are there duplicate room numbers within the building?
• Has there been additions to the building and were the new building room num-
bers coordinated with the existing building room numbers?
• Has there been the addition of several letters after a single room number to
accommodate new rooms?
• Has the use of the rooms in a building changed?
• Has there been a major relocation of services within the building?
• If a patient or visitor is given a room number to go to, can they find it without
asking someone for directions?
In a facility wide replacement sign project, it is important that improved patient
wayfinding is not hindered by keeping an outdated and broken room renumbering
systems in order to maintain current facility management systems. There are vari-
ous ways to address new room numbering in facility management systems that
maintain the database with current room renumbering.

Refer to the Room Renumbering section of this Guide for additional information.

12/2012 Page 2-4

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Getting Help It is recommended that an Environmental Graphic Design firm be hired for the
development of large-scale interior and exterior sign programs. The contractual
options are: (Option 1) Include services as a part of an overall Architect-Engineer
(A-E) contract; (Option 2) Utilize existing “Open-Ended Architect-Engineer” con-
tracts and engage the firm as a subcontractor; (Option 3) Hire an Environmental
Graphic Design firm like any other A-E firm.

The following document is an example of a typical statement of work for engaging

environmental graphic design programming services for a project. The statement
of work can be used as a template. Also, following are samples of evaluation cri-
teria and questions that can used as an aid in the selection process for a qualified
Environmental Graphic Design firm.

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
figure 1
STATEMENT OF WORK

VAMC ___________________
ENVIRONMENTAL GRAPHIC PLANNING SERVICES

This statement of work is to provide environmental graphic design services.

The project will plan, design and program an interior and exterior sign and graphics
program for the VAMC _________ and Community Based Outpatient Clinics (CBOCs)
located in the ___________ area. The exterior sign program will identify buildings and
provide directional wayfinding. The interior sign program will develop a new room
numbering system, provide for new code / life safety signs, new room identification and a
directional wayfinding sign program.

During the course of the development of the directional wayfinding sign program for the
interior, coordination will be conducted with the facility to identify architectural, interior
design and communication issues at the facility that can be improved to provide better
circulation and communication of services for patients and visitors. In the development of
the directional wayfinding sign program for the exterior, coordination will be conducted
to identify site circulation issues for both vehicles and pedestrians that can be improved to
provide better circulation and parking for patients and visitors.

The sign program “design look” will be developed to coordinate with the VA Signage
Design Guide utilizing a component base sign system.

A. QUALIFICATIONS FOR SCOPE OF WORK

The Environmental Graphic Design firm shall have experience in providing design
services specifically for the development of interior and exterior signage for health care
facilities. The environmental graphic designer’s activities and experience requirements are:

1. Primary business activity (70%) is in the field of Environmental Graphic Design

performing the work of sign programming and design.

2. Project Manager assigned to signage planning, wayfinding and programming must

have extensive experience with programming the room and informational signing
for the interior and exterior of large medical centers. Included are the development
of a wayfinding (directional) sign programs, room number and life safety signing,
the development of pedestrian and vehicle wayfinding sign programs, building and
entrance identification and traffic/regulatory signing. Extensive experience refers to
1

12/2012 Page 2-5

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
(continued) having worked on and managed multiple large sized (250+bed) medical centers as
figure 1 well as mental health facilities, community living centers and outpatient clinics.

3. Ability to provide sign location plans in AutoCAD (if AutoCAD files are available
from the VA for the buildings and sites involved).

4. Professional member of the Society for Environmental Graphic Design.

5. Thorough familiarity with the VA’s Signage Design Guide.

6. Knowledge of medical terminology and operational characteristics of medical

centers and clinics.

7. Selected firm will be excluded from bidding the sign product and installation.

8. Project manager assigned to the project must have experience in developing new
room numbering systems for medical centers.

B. PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK

1. INTERIOR TASKS

a. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will review the existing room numbering
system and advise the medical center if it needs to be replaced. If the existing
room numbering system is “broken”, the Environmental Graphic Design firm will
develop a new room numbering system for all rooms and all floors of the selected
medical center/clinic. This room numbering system is one that is to be directed
toward visitors and staff. Proposed options for new room numbering system will
be reviewed with facility Engineering and Interior Design.

b. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will design and program an interior
room identification sign program. This will involve programming and sign
location plans being prepared for all of the room identification signs throughout
the selected medical center/ facility. This will include a complete sign message
schedule identifying each sign, its message and its type. Sign location plans will be
prepared showing the placement/location and mounting method of the signs.

c. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will design and program a life safety,
code and regulatory sign program. This will involve programming and sign
location plans being prepared for all of the regulatory, code and life safety signs
throughout the selected medical center/facility. This will include a complete sign
message schedule identifying each sign, its message and its type. Sign location
plans will be prepared showing the placement/location and mounting method of
regulatory, code and life safety signs.

d. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will design and program a directional
wayfinding sign program. This will involve programming and sign location plans
being prepared for all of the directional signs throughout the selected medical
center/facility. This will include a complete sign message schedule identifying each
sign, its message and its type. Sign location plans will be prepared showing the
placement/location and mounting method of directional signs.

e. The Environmental Graphic Design Specialist will develop a report identifying

architectural, interior design and communication problems at the facilities that
need to be changed and improved to provide better identification, circulation and
communication of services for patients and visitors.

12/2012 Page 2-6

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work
Sample Statement of work
(continued)
figure 1 f. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will develop the design scheme for
the “look” of the interior sign program. The design will generally define the
various types of signs that will be used throughout the project along with issues
of image, materials and finishes, typography and layout, and color. Terminology,
names and titles, flexibility of the system, form and scale, and legibility will also
be considerations in developing the design scheme. The design documents will
identify material finishes, trims, sign construction, installation and other design
details. The documents will include elevation drawing of each sign type with
applicable size and layout dimensions and any necessary side, top and back views.

g. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare complete specifications for
the product(s) being specified for the project.

h. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare suitable documentation

necessary for the VA to obtain pricing/quotations for the demolition of existing
signs and the installation of new signs. The Environmental Graphics Design firm
will be required to prepare any of the VA’s bidding documentation, excluding VA’s
standard forms.

i. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare a pre-construction budget

for product, demolition and installation.

j. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will provide construction

implementation services which include reviewing submittal and shop drawings
submissions and perform a pre-installation walk thru with contractor. At
completion of installation, the Environmental Graphic Design firm will make a
final inspection walk through and prepare a “punch list” report noting deficiencies
and corrections necessary for the contractor to complete the project.

k. The interior signs will be designed with consideration given to the ATBCB’s
guideline for accessible signage related to the Americans with Disabilities Act.

l. Examples of the types of interior signs that will be included in the scope of work
are: Primary room/department identification signs; Patient room signs; Secondary
room identification signs; Informational signs; Wall and ceiling mounted
directional signs; Entrance lobby signs; VISN identification signage; Regulatory,
life safety code and restrictive signs.

2. EXTERIOR TASKS

a. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will design and program an exterior
wayfinding/directional sign program. This will involve programming and
sign location plans being prepared showing the placement of the signs and
their respective messages. This will include a complete sign message schedule
identifying each sign, its message and its type. Sign location plans and photographs
will be prepared showing the exact placement/location and installation method of
the directional signs.

b. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will design and program an exterior
building identification sign program. This will involve programming and
sign location plans being prepared showing the placement of the signs and
their respective messages. This will include a complete sign message schedule
identifying each sign, its message and its type. Sign location plans and photographs
will be prepared showing the exact placement/location and installation method of
the building identification signs. The signs on the building may be augmented with

12/2012 Page 2-7

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
(continued)
freestanding signs as necessary to assist in identifying buildings.
figure 1
c. The Environmental Graphic Design Specialist will develop a report identifying
site circulation issues for both vehicles and pedestrians that can be improved to
provide better access, circulation and parking for patients and visitors.

d. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will develop the design scheme for
the “look” of the exterior sign program. The design will generally define the
various types of signs that will be used throughout the project along with issues
of image, materials, finishes, typography and layout, and color. Terminology,
names and titles, flexibility of the system, form and scale, and legibility will also
be considerations in developing the design scheme. The design documents will
identify material finishes, trims, sign construction, installation and other design
details. The documents will include an elevation drawing of each sign type with
applicable size and layout dimensions and any necessary side, top and back views.

e. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare complete specifications for
the product being specified for the project.

f. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare suitable documentation

necessary for the VA to obtain pricing/quotations for the demolition of existing
signs and the installation of new signs. The design firm will not be required to
prepare any of the VA’s bidding documentation.

g. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will provide construction

implementation services which include reviewing submittal and shop drawings
submissions and perform a pre-installation walk thru with contractor. At
completion of installation, the Environmental Graphic Design firm will make a
final inspection walk through and prepare a “punch list” report noting deficiencies
and corrections necessary for the contractor to complete the project.

h. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will prepare a pre-construction budget

for product, demolition and installation.

i. Examples of the types of exterior signs that will be included in the scope of work
are: Freestanding, wall or building mounted identification signs; Freestanding, wall
or building mounted directional signs; Parking lot identification and parking stall
signs; Traffic signs; Site identification signs.

3. AREA OF WORK

a. The interior sign area of work at VAMC ________________ is defined as the

interior of the medical center complex and ______ community based outpatient
clinics (CBOCs).

b. The exterior sign area of work at VAMC _________________ is defined as the

traffic and parking lot signs and building identification signage.

4. PHASES OF WORK

a. Phase 1 - PLANNING

Project begins with an initial meeting with the Environmental Graphic Design
firm, the network planner, the medical center/facility project coordinator, and
appropriate VAMC staff. It begins by defining and refining the scope of the
project in greater detail and reviewing the responsibilities of the Environmental

12/2012 Page 2-8

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
(continued)
Graphic Design firm and facility staff regarding input, design, documentation,
figure 1 coordination, direction and approvals. A project schedule will be established
which relates to the project’s sequence of events and priorities of importance.
Functional relationships will be discussed regarding design character,
implementation phasing, document submissions and purchasing/bidding
procedures.

Deliverables: 3 hard copies and 1 electronic file (PDF format); A project schedule.

b. Phase 2 - NEW ROOM NUMBER PROGRAMMING

The Environmental Graphic Design firm will survey and review the selected
medical center/facility buildings and develop a new room numbering system. The
room numbering scheme will be presented to the Facility Director and appropriate
staff for their review, comment and approval.

Deliverables: 3 hard copies and 1 electronic file (PDF and DWG format). Drawings
illustrating the proposed room numbering scheme. A conversion table listing new
and old room numbers.

c. Phase 3 - PRELIMINARY PROGRAMMING and DESIGN

The Environmental Graphic Design firm will revise the new room numbering
system based upon comments received from the facility. When the room
numbering revisions are complete, the Environmental Graphic Design firm will
issue the final documentation to the facility project coordinator that will consist of
floor plans, which list both the new and the old number. This documentation will
be incorporated into the new room identification sign program.

The Environmental Graphic Design firm will survey and review the project for
sign locations, text and placements. With the exterior signs, evaluations will be
made regarding sign illumination requirements. For the exterior directional signs,
evaluations will involve analyzing public, employee and vehicular circulation and
traffic flow patterns around the project site. On the basis of information gathered
in these activities and in the Planning Phase, the Environmental Graphic Design
firm will develop the schematic design scheme for the “look” of the sign program.
The Environmental Graphic Design firm will identify finishes, trims, types of
signs and other design details. This will all be based upon a component based sign
system as identified in the VA Sign Design Guide, created for the Department
of Veterans Affairs. Emphasis will be placed on developing a sign program that
provides the facility with a progressive professional look, coordinated with the
building’s interior design and architecture, re-cycle element of the existing exterior
sign program, if possible, and address the facility’s maintenance requirements.
For both the interior of the buildings and the exterior signs for the campus, a
preliminary sign location plan will be prepared along with a preliminary sign
message schedule.

The schematic design scheme, preliminary sign location plan and preliminary
message schedule will be presented to Facility Management, coordinated by
the facility project manager, for their review and comment. The Environmental
Graphic Design Specialist will assist the facility in the review of the documents
and the assembly of the facilities review comments.

Deliverables: 3 hard copies and 1 electronic file (PDF); Drawings illustrating

the proposed look, color, trim, etc. of the interior and exterior sign program;

12/2012 Page 2-9

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
(continued) Preliminary sign location plan and message schedule.
figure 1
d. Phase 4 - FINAL PROGRAMMING and DESIGN

After the schematic design of the sign program and the preliminary sign location
plan and message schedule has been reviewed and approved by the medical center/
facility, the Environmental Graphic Design firm will proceed to develop the draft
of the sign project documents involving the sign type drawings and specifications.

These documents will show preliminary illustrations of all interior and exterior
sign types in the sign program. A preliminary draft of the specifications and
budget will be developed that will define the cost of implementing the program.
The Environmental Graphic Design firm will revise the sign location plan and
message schedule. These documents will be presented to appropriate facility staff
for review and comment.

Deliverables: 3 hard copies and 1 electronic file (PDF); Preliminary version of the
sign project manual showing all of the sign types, revised sign location plans and
message schedule; Preliminary specifications and budget.

e. Phase 5 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

In this phase, the Environmental Graphic Design firm refines and finalizes the
physical design of the signs, based upon client input from design development
documents. The facility project coordinator will return the design development
sign type drawings, sign location plan and message schedule to the Environmental
Graphic Design firm with final comments and final revisions. The Environmental
Graphic Design firm will prepare the final sign project manual. The sign project
manual will follow the general format of detailed sign type drawings, defining
all of the signs in the hierarchy of the sign program, selected sign construction
details, sign installation details and specifications. The sign type drawings will
include elevation drawings of each sign type with applicable size and layout
dimensions and any necessary side, top and back views. It will also contain the
interior and exterior sign message schedule, which defines the wording of each
sign, referenced to the particular sign type and location. Final specifications will be
provided for both the interior and exterior signs. Final sign location plans, in the
form of AUTOCAD files will be provided for both the interior and exterior sign
locations. A pre-construction budget estimate will be developed for implementing
the program.

Deliverables: 3 hard copies and 1 electronic file (PDF and DWG format); Sign
Project Manual/Document containing – Specifications, Sign Type Elevation,
Layout, Detail and Mounting Drawings, Sign Message Schedule and Sign Location
Drawings, pre-construction budget.

f. Phase 6 - CONSTRUCTION / IMPLEMENTATION PHASE

The Environmental Graphic Design firm is to assist the facility project coordinator
with the following services.

i. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will provide advice and direction to
the VA in matters related to the contractors and suppliers during the course
of the implementation of the project. The Environmental Graphic Design
firm will have no direct or indirect affiliation with any of the contractors or
suppliers involved with the implementation of the project.

12/2012 Page 2-10

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Statement of Work Sample Statement of work
(continued) ii. Review all design submissions at the medical center with VAMC project
figure 1 coordinator and other appropriate staff.

iii. Review the fabricator/sign contractors’ submittals, shop drawings and

samples to ensure compliance with the Bid/Project Design Documents. The
review could consist of one complete submittal and one revised submittal.

iv. The Environmental Graphic Design firm will visit the project site with the
facility project coordinator and the sign contractor and perform a pre-
installation walk through for both the interior and exterior sign project.

v. At the completion of all fabrication and installation, the Environmental

Graphic Design firm will make a final inspection walk through of the project
and prepare a report noting deficiencies and corrections necessary for the
sign contractor to complete both the interior and the exterior sign projects.

vi. At the completion of final inspection corrections, the Environmental Graphic

Design firm will make a final inspection walk through of the project and
prepare a report noting if there are still any outstanding deficiencies and
corrections necessary for the sign contractor to complete both the interior
and the exterior sign projects.

5. PRELIMINARY PROJECT SCHEDULE

Phase 1: ____ weeks; Phase 2: ____ weeks; Phase 3: ____ weeks;

Phase 4: ____ weeks; Phase 5: ____ weeks

6. EXCLUSIONS

The fabrication and installation of signs, site electrical and the engineering within
signs is by others. Interior signs not included in the scope of work are: illuminated
fire safety exit signs, signs related to or on equipment or fixtures, and signs relating to
employee operational matters. Exterior signs not included in the scope of work are:
parking stall identification, signs related to or on equipment or fixtures and striping
and pavement markings.

7. PROJECT COORDINATOR

_____________________________________

NOTE
This statement of work is a general guide to assist in the development of a scope
for a project and facility. Close coordination with a Contracting Officer will help tailor
the document to meet current contracting requirements and procedures.

12/2012 Page 2-11

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample
Federal Business
Sample Federal business opportunity ad
Opportunity Ad
figure 2
DESCRIPTION: IDENTIFINITE DELIVERY CONTRACT (OPEN-END) FOR

ENVIRONMENTAL GRAPHIC DESIGN PROGRAMMING SERVICES

The project will provide professional services necessary for various environmental graphic
design services for VA medical centers located in the VA Integrated Service Network
(VISN) ____. The VISN ____ facilities will include VAMC ___________. Also included
will be various Community Based Outpatient Clinics in the VISN ___ catchment area.
Services include design and program of interior and exterior signage, directional wayfind-
ing signage, new room numbering system directed towards visitors and staff, life safety,
code and regulatory signage, traffic regulatory signs. This will involve programming and
sign location plans for all signs throughout the medical center/facility. Area of consider-
ation is within the continental United States. The environmental graphic design firm shall
perform work on an indefinite quantity (Open-Ended) basis. When services are required,
a work order will be issued. Work orders will be issued by the Contracting Officer and
will detail the scope of work. The environmental graphic designer, VA and Contracting
Officer will review the scope of work and negotiate the amount of hours required and the
completion schedule. VA intends to award an open-ended Environmental Graphic Design
contract. The Government is uncertain as to the number of task orders that will be placed
against the contract during the term of the contract. Award of individual task orders is
contingent upon project funding. Selection criteria will be based on: (1) Primary business
activity (70%) is in the field of Environmental Graphic Design performing the work of sig-
nage programming and design. (2) Project Manager assigned signage programming must
have extensive experience with programming the room and informational signing for the
interior of large medical centers including the development of a wayfinding (directional)
sign program and life safety signing. Extensive experience refers to having worked on and
managed multiple large sized (250+ bed) medical centers as well as psychiatric hospitals,
nursing homes, and outpatient clinics. Be familiar with hospital departments and their
interaction with one another. (3) Project Manager assigned signage programming must
have extensive experience with programming the signing for the exterior of large medical
centers. This includes the development of pedestrian and vehicle wayfinding (direc-
tional) signs program, building and entrance identification and traffic/regulatory signing.
Extensive experience refers to having worked on exterior sign programs for multiple
medical centers in rural, suburban, and urban locations. (4) Ability to provide sign loca-
tion plans in AutoCAD (if AutoCAD files are available from the VA for the buildings and
sites involved). (5) Professional member of the Society for Environmental Graphic Design.
(6) Thorough familiarity with the VA’s Environmental Graphic Design Program Guide. (7)
Knowledge of medical terminology and operational characteristics of hospitals, psychi-
atric hospitals, nursing homes, and outpatient clinics. (8) Selected firm will be excluded
from bidding the sign product, demolition and installation. (9) Project manager assigned
to the project must have experience in developing new room numbering systems for
medical centers. Environmental Graphic Design firms that meet the requirements listed in
this announcement are invited to submit two (2) copies of the completed Standard Forms
(SF) 254 and 255 by _________________. SIC code 8711 applies. No bid packages are
available. This is not a Request for Proposal (RFP).

12/2012 Page 2-12

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample The following are some rating factors that can be used in the selection process for
Rating Factors an Environmental Graphic Design firm.

1. Primary business activity (70%) is in the field of Environmental Graphic

Design performing the work of signage programming and design.
2. Project Manager assigned signage programming must have extensive experi-
ence with programming the room and informational signing for the interior of
large medical centers including the development of a wayfinding (directional)
sign program and life safety signing. Extensive experience refers to having
worked on and managed multiple large sized (250+ bed) medical centers as
well as psychiatric hospitals nursing homes, and outpatient clinics.
3. Project Manager assigned to signage programming must have extensive
experience with programming the signing for the exterior of large medical
centers. This includes the development of pedestrian and vehicle wayfinding
(directional) signs program, building and entrance identification and traffic/
regulatory signing. Extensive experience refers to having worked on exterior
sign programs for multiple medical centers in rural, suburban, and urban
locations.
4. Ability to provide sign location plans in AutoCAD (if AutoCAD files are avail-
able from the VA for the buildings and sites involved).
5. Professional member of the Society for Environmental Graphic Design.
6. Thorough familiarity with the VA’s Signage Design Guide.
7. Knowledge of medical terminology and operational characteristics of hospi-
tals, psychiatric hospitals, community living centers, and outpatient clinics.
8. Selected firm will be excluded from bidding the sign product, demolition and
installation.
9. Project manager assigned to the project must have experience in developing
new room numbering systems for medical centers.
10. Provide 5 client references (past projects) that can be contacted for back-
ground and performance information on the Environmental Graphic Design
firm.

12/2012 Page 2-13

 Get Help Need a Sign Program

Sample The following are some interview questions that can be used in the selection pro-
Questions for cess for evaluating an Environmental Graphic Design firm.
Environmental Graphic
Design Firm During 1. What type of firm is _____________?
Interview 2. How long has the firm been in business?
3. Is the firm affiliated with, or a division of, another firm or sign company?
4. Does the firm sell signs or any other manufactured product?
5. How long has the firm been designing sign programs for medical centers?
6. How many interior and exterior sign programs has the firm designed for medi-
cal centers?
7. What is the largest medical center that the firm has designed a sign
program for?
8. How many VA Medical Centers has the firm designed and programmed? And,
what are the names of those facilities?
9. Does the firm have any VA projects currently underway?
10. What comprises the firm’s staff and what is their experience in the field of
Environmental Graphic Design?
11. What is the educational background of the staff?
12. How many people typically work on a project?
13. Who works on the Design Phase of a project and then who works on the
Construction Phase?
14. What are the 5 most recent projects bid?
15. What are the 5 most recent projects completed? (fabricated and installed)
16. What are the 5 most recent medical facility projects?
17. What are 5 projects currently in design at the firm?
18. Has the firm received any awards for design excellence?
19. Has the firm had any litigation involvement in the last 5 years?
If so, what was the outcome?
20. Is the firm a Veteran owned firm?
21. How familiar is the firm with the sign products available?
22. Is the firm familiar with GSA sign manufacturers?

12/2012 Page 2-14

 Process Need a Sign Program

The Project Process The process to develop a new sign program for a medical center, a site or a build-
ing, can take several months or even a year to complete.

Programming the signage requirements for a facility first requires a definition of the
project to be undertaken.

Interior sign programs are generally best undertaken with projects that involve
remodeling, repainting or refurbishing. When an old sign program is removed there
is generally considerable refurbishment needed to walls. A new interior sign pro-
gram sign quantity will generally be two thirds of the signs that are removed, so
there is considerable patching, repairs and painting involved.

An exterior sign program may require repairs to landscaping, new electrical, repair-
ing walks, walls and paved surfaces. It is best to undertake an exterior sign program
for the entire medical campus rather than attempting to do it piecemeal. Doing just
a portion of a campus will lead to confusion on the part of patients and visitors
because when they see new signs they will not be sure that the information on an
old sign is correct.

The following is a sign program project template that outlines the various tasks,
documentation and events in a sign project for a building or a site. This overview
can also function as a “project road map” to keep a sign project on track for mile-
stones and deliverables.

Phase 1 Engaging an Environmental Graphic Design Firm

Objective • Selection of a qualified firm to provide sign

programming and design services.
Determine what needs to be
accomplished.

Environmental Graphic • Submitting profile and qualifications.

Design Firm Tasks
Verify what will be done by the
Environmental Graphic Design firm.

Documentation • GSA Form 330

Establish what will be delivered.

VA Project • Coordination of the review and approval

Management Tasks process with Contracting.
Identify what will be done by the • Assembly of the personnel that will be involved
VA. in the selection review process.

Approvals • Coordinated by Contracting.

Determine what approvals need to
be achieved.

Time • 8 to 16 weeks
Determine how much time will be
required.

12/2012 Page 2-15

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 2 Establishing the Project Team

Objective • Development of project milestones.

Determine what needs to be • Development of the review and approval
accomplished. process.
• Assembly of the personnel that will be involved
in the project.

Environmental Graphic • Project manager and design team staff

Design Firm Tasks finalized.
Verify what will be done by the • Prepare a project time line.
Environmental Graphic Design firm.

Documentation • Project time line

Establish what will be delivered.

VA Project • Develop the core committee that will function

Management Tasks as the project lead.
Identify what will be done by the • Develop a process for reviewing the project
VA. documentation.

Approvals • Prepare a project document review time line.

Determine what approvals need to • Develop the channel of approvals that will be
be achieved. utilized for the project.

12/2012 Page 2-16

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 3 Programming
Defining the scope of the project, the criteria for the design and any special
requirements.

Objective • Defining the project.

Determine what needs to be • Defining the influences.
accomplished. • Identifying the coordinating elements.

Environmental Graphic • Determine where signs are needed.

Design Firm Tasks • Determine the types of signs required.
Verify what will be done by the • Determine the circulation system and decision
Environmental Graphic Design firm. points.
• Develop a preliminary message schedule of
text for the signs.
• Identify specific site and/or architectural
conditions.
• Define special requirements for lighting,
installation and maintenance.
• Identify coordination issues with architect,
landscape architect and interior designer.
• Establish budget objectives.

Documentation • Sign message schedule and location plan.

Establish what will be delivered.

VA Project • Review the sign message schedule and loca-

Management Tasks tion plan providing comment and revisions.
Identify what will be done by the • Provide input and direction on budgets.
VA

Approvals • Documents being developed so there are no

approvals.
Determine what approvals need to
be achieved.

Time • Depending on the overall size of the project,

this can take 2 to 12 weeks.
Determine how much time will be
required.

12/2012 Page 2-17

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 4 Design Development

Creating the design look of the sign and graphics program and resolving issues.

Objective • Defining the look, image and design character.

Determine what needs to be • Applying the image and design character to the
accomplished. needs defined in the Programming Phase.

Environmental Graphic • Define the various types of signs to be used.

Design Firm Tasks • Define issues of image, finishes, layout, and
Verify what will be done by the color.
Environmental Graphic Design firm. • Define terminology, names and titles.
• Drawings of all the interior and exterior sign
types that will be included in the sign program.
• Revise sign location plan and message
schedule.
• Develop preliminary budget.
• Coordinate with other design consultants.

Documentation • Presentation drawings of the proposed design

look.
Establish what will be delivered.
• Drawings showing all sign types.
• Revised sign location plans and message
schedule.
• Preliminary budget.

VA Project • Review design concepts and drawings and

Management Tasks provide comments.
Identify what will be done by the • Review sign message schedule and location
VA. plan providing comment and revision.

Approvals • VA approval of Design Development

documents.
Determine what approvals need to
be achieved.

Time • Starting during Programming, this phase will

take 5 to 10 weeks.
Determine the amount of time
required.

12/2012 Page 2-18

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 5 Final Design

Preparation of documentation for the manufacturing and installation of the sign and
graphics program.

Objective • Final documentation for purchasing

implementation.
Determine what needs to be
accomplished.

Environmental Graphic • Prepare final sign location plans and

Design Firm Tasks message schedule.
Verify what will be done by the • Prepare final sign type drawings, text layout,
Environmental Graphic Design firm. construction details.
• Prepare installation and mounting details.
• Prepare specifications.
• Develop pre-construction budget.
• Provide list of pre-qualified GSA sign
manufacturers.

Documentation • Drawings showing all sign types, details,

mounting and layouts.
Establish what will be delivered.
• Final sign messages schedule and location
plan.
• Pre-construction budget.
• Specifications.

VA Project • Review the final sign location plan,

Management Tasks message schedule, sign type drawings and
specifications.
Identify what will be done by the
VA.

Approvals • VA approval of Final Design documents.

Determine what approvals need to
be achieved.

Time • This phase will take 6 to 8 weeks.

Determine how much time will be
required.

12/2012 Page 2-19

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 6 Demolition
Removal of existing sign program

Objective • Defining what work is to be accomplished

regarding removal of existing signs.
Determine what is to be
accomplished.

Environmental Graphic • Develop documentation.

Design Firm Tasks
Verify what will be done by the
Environmental Graphic Design firm.

Documentation • Documentation describing the scope of demo-

lition work. This can consist of photographs,
Establish what will be delivered.
description of work and plans of location of
signs to be removed.

VA Project • Provide direction on the scope of demolition to

Management Tasks be addressed.
Identify what will be done by the • Review demolition documentation.
VA. • Review sign removal schedule and plan provid-
ing comment and revisions.

Approvals • VA approval of demolition documents.

Determine what approvals need to
be achieved.

Time • 2 to 4 weeks
Determine how much time will be
required.

Sign Company • Removal of demolition approved signs as well

Responsibilities as any corresponding signage components.

12/2012 Page 2-20

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 7 Purchasing
Bidding and entering into a contract for manufacturing and installation.

Objective • Engage a qualified manufacturer and installer.

Determine what needs to be
accomplished.

Environmental Graphic • Assist in the pricing process by answering

Design Firm Tasks questions and providing clarifications.
Verify what will be done by the
Environmental Graphic Design firm.

Documentation • Form 90-2237

Established what will be delivered. • Statement of Work
• Estimate

VA Project • Contracting Officer conducts the purchasing

Management Tasks process.
Identify what will be done by the
VA.

Approvals • Pricing Abstract

Determine what approvals need to • Technical Team
be achieved. • Contractor Qualifications
• Grade Review

Time • This phase will take 4 to 10 weeks.

Determine how much time will be
required.

Sign Company • Material samples and drawings for sign fabri-

Responsibilities cation and installation.
• Materials for samples and/or sign prototypes.

12/2012 Page 2-21

 Process Need a Sign Program

Phase 8 Implementation
Manufacturing and installation

Objective • Install and complete the project.

Determine what is to be
accomplished.

Environmental Graphic • Review of shop drawings.

Design Firm Tasks • Review of materials, finishes, colors
Verify what will be done by the and samples.
Environmental Graphic Design firm. • Develop change orders.
• Perform pre-installation walk through.
• Perform punch list inspection.
• Prepare punch list report.

Documentation • Reviewed shop drawings.

Establish what will be delivered. • Reviewed materials, finishes, colors
and samples.
• Punch list inspection report.

VA Project • Review shop drawings.

Management Tasks • Review materials, finishes, colors and
Identify what will be done by the samples.
VA. • Review punch list inspection report.
• Provide access to the building and site.
• Coordination with facility staff.

Approvals • Acceptance of installed project.

Determine what approvals need to • Receiving Report.
be achieved.

Time • Generally projects take from 12 to 20 weeks,

depending on their size and scope.
Determine how much time will be
required.

Sign Company • Creation of shop drawings

Responsibilities • Creation of material, finish and color samples.
• Creation of requested sign prototypes.
• Fabrication of signage structures.
• Production of large format printed graphics.
• Installation of signage structures.

12/2012 Page 2-22

 Process Need a Sign Program

Getting Help for a While this information will provide guidance for all projects, much of what has been
Small Project discussed relates to large scale sign programs. The approach for small projects will
be similar whether design/programming services are engaged or the work is done
“in house”, with VA staff and resources.

Specifying environmental graphic design and programming services as a part

of a purchase order for a small sign project is an option that can be considered.
However, be careful in retaining control and defining the qualification of the pro-
grammer/designer who will be doing the work.

There is an inherent conflict of interests with the programmer/designer working

for the manufacturer and not the ultimate client, with a tendency to over specify
the quantity of sign products needed or the types of signs being provided. Make
sure the scope of work being provided by a manufacturer is also clearly spelled
out, in detail, relating to the exact type of programming services that is going to be
provided.

Be suspect if the manufacturer does not identify the true cost for designing and
programming services and “buries” it in the product cost. Programming and design
services are never free.

12/2012 Page 2-23

 Programming Need a Sign Program

Interior Sign The Sign Message Schedule is a spread sheet listing the variety of unique speci-
Message Schedule fications for each sign in the project. The Message Schedule is first developed
during the Programming phase of the sign process. Refined during Design develop-
ment and finalized at the Final Design phase. The Message Schedule specifies
sign location, specific sign text, and sign type. Additional information as to quantity,
notes, layout symbols, revision dates and special conditions should be included.

• Floor: Interior sign schedules include a floor level number for each sign.
Exterior message schedules do not include a floor level designation.
• Location: A number designating the location of a sign on a particular floor
(location numbers should not be repeated on the same floor). There is typically
a symbol indicating the orientation of a sign in plan view. A symbol parallel to a
wall, designates the general location of a sign on a wall. Symbols for overhead
signs are often located in the center of a hallway, or at a doorway opening.
Symbols perpendicular to a wall indicate flag signs. To determine the specific
horizontal placement of a sign, refer to the sign type drawing. To determine
mounting height, refer to the installation details.
• Sign Type: A variety of sign types are typically used in a project. The size,
design configuration and text layout vary amongst different sign types.
• Sign Text: The Message Schedule lists the text on each sign. Text required is
specific to each location.
• Sign Side: Needs to be specified on all double sided signs. If one side is blank
the words (blank) will appear in the message schedule.
• Quantity: In some situations more than one sign will be necessary at a par-
ticular location. Signs are often stacked horizontally on a wall to accommodate
multiple signs sharing the same location.
• Layout/Symbol: Many signs use icons. For example, the accessible symbol, of
a person in a wheelchair, is to indicate an accessible restroom.
• Notes: Critical information in any project can be listed in the notes. “Client to
verify text” if often listed indicating that the copy is not final and need client
approval prior to fabrication.
• Glass Backers: Signs installed on glass doors, windows and side lights, glass
backers are installed to cover the back side of mounting tape.

Figure 3
Interior Message Schedule Installation
Interior Message Building Name Glass
Schedule Side Backer
Layout/ Revised
Floor Location Sign Type Sign Text Quantity Notes
Symbol Date
2 201 IN14.01 Clinic E
Main Lobby 1
-------------------------
Therapy Services
Radiation Therapy

2 203 IN19.01 1 Mount to yes

Pharmacy
sidelight

CAUTION
2 207 IN01.22 1 Biohaz. Mount to
BIOHAZARD
symbol door
(symbol)

IN03.01 1359
2 206 Soiled 1
IN04.02
Utility

IN09.01 Men
2 205 (men symbol) 1
symbol
12/2012 Page 2-24

2 202 IN03.01 1360 1

 Programming Need a Sign Program

Interior Sign Interior Locations Plans show sign locations relative to doors, walls, hallways,
Location Plan lobbies. The signs are placed to identify rooms, as well as areas, and provide a
wayfinding system to help patients and visitors locate rooms and services. Sign
Location Plans are architectural floor plan drawings showing sign locations, which
are cross referenced to the corresponding message schedule. These drawings can
be part of the architectural drawing set or a separate document. The drawings need
to be drawn to scale and exterior plans need north orientation. Location plans can
be a variety of sized documents such as Architectural A to E size or 11"x 17" lay-
outs. The drawings must be printed so that location call outs are legible.

Figure 4
Interior Location Plan

206 205
200A 200B 203
207 202

201

208 204

Location
Building Floor Plan

12/2012 Page 2-25

 Programming Need a Sign Program

Exterior Sign The Exterior Sign Message Schedule is a spread sheet listing the variety of unique
Message Schedule specifications for each sign in the project. The Message Schedule is first devel-
oped during the Programming phase of the sign process. Refined during Design
Developments and finalized at the Final Design phase. The Message Schedule
specifies sign location, the specific sign text and sign type. Additional information
as to quantity, notes, layout symbols, revision dates and special conditions should
be included.

• Location: A unique number representing each sign location. The symbol indi-
cates the orientation of the sign on the site.
• Sign Type: A variety of sign types are used in a project. The size, design con-
figuration and text layout vary from different sign types.
• Sign Text: The Message Schedule lists the text on each sign. Text required is
specific to each location.
• Sign Side: Needs to be specified on all double sided signs. If one side is blank
the words (blank) will appear in the message schedule.
• Quantity: In some situations more than one sign will be necessary at a par-
ticular location.
• Notes: Critical information in any project can be listed in the notes. “Client to
verify text” if often listed indicating that the copy is not final and need client
approval prior to fabrication.

Figure 5
Exterior Message Schedule

Installation
Exterior Message Building Name
Schedule Revised
Location Sign Type Sign Text Side Quantity Notes
Date

002 EN03.02 Exit A 1

----------------
Visitor Parking B
Patient Drop Off

001 EN09.07 Medical Center (logo) 1

(underscore)

003 EN09.03 2151 N. Harbor Blvd. 1

004 EN05.03 Service 1

Vehicles
Only

007 EN10.03 YIELD 1

12/2012 Page 2-26

 Programming Need a Sign Program

Exterior Sign Exterior Locations Plans show building location within a site and vehicular, as
Location Plan well as pedestrian, paths of travel. Roads, buildings, landscape layouts, building
entries. Sign Location Plans are Architectural or Civil plan drawings showing sign
locations. These drawings can be part of the architectural drawing set or a separate
document. Drawings need to be drawn to scale and exterior plans need north ori-
entation. Location plans can be a variety of sized documents such as Architectural
A to E size or 11"x 17" layouts. The drawings must be printed so that location call
outs are legible.

Figure 6
Exterior Location Plan 001

002A
009
002B
011
012
PATIENT 010 003
DROP-OFF S
DELIVERIE
004
006 005

007
008
Sign location number

12/2012 Page 2-27

 Sign Industry Need a Sign Program

Picking a Sign Not all sign companies are the same and they don’t all have the same capabilities.
Company Typically sign companies specialize in one of two types of signs groups. These
groups are generally the ones that fit the company’s manufacturing capabilities.
There are certain sign products that almost all sign companies buy from select
vendors because of the specialized processes required to produce the product (i.e.
cast metal plaques cast metal letters).

It is important to work only with a sign company that has a current state contrac-
tors license. Most states require a license for site sign construction, installation and
electrical work. The sign company (contractor) must pay a fee and pass a lengthy
test, which determines their ability to perform the work correctly. The fee they pay
is insurance in the form of a Surety Bond with the state construction contractors
board. This provides a limited amount of financial security in the event the contrac-
tor is ordered to pay damages due to failure to uphold a contract. Having a license
also is a way to be sure the company is not an operation “working out of the back
of a truck”.

Types of Sign The sign industry is generally divided into four main categories – Electrical,
Companies Commercial, Architectural, and Service. Within these categories there are compa-
nies that range in size from small to large and provide products and services locally,
regionally and nationally.

The key to a successful sign project is to select the correct type of sign company to
build and install the type of signs needed. An analogy would be, that if you broke
your ankle, what kind of doctor would you go to: a cardiologist, a gynecologist or an
orthopedic doctor. They are all doctors, however, they do not all practice the same
specialties.

Electrical Sign Company: The electrical sign company typically has a large
manufacturing facility and are capable of fabricating large electrical signs including
large pylon signs, skyline building signs, illuminated letters, neon signs, electronic
dynamic displays and many more types of custom lighted signs. They will also have
computerized equipment for cutting of custom letters and sign elements. They will
have boom trucks or crane trucks for high-rise and large sign installation along with
a variety of service vehicles. They will have installation staff and vehicles, permit
services, drafting departments and maintenance services.

Architectural Sign Company: An architectural sign company typically manufac-

tures sign products found in “institutional” or public facilities, such as hospitals, civic
buildings, airports, corporate buildings, and schools. These companies manufac-
ture and install both interior and exterior signs and their products tend to be more
integrated into the architecture and environment as opposed to presenting a com-
mercial appearance. They will have installation staff and vehicles, permit services,
design and drafting departments and maintenance services.

This type of sign company is best suited for providing signage to a VA facility.

Commercial Sign Company: This group is generally comprised of Retail Sign

Companies, Franchise Sign Companies and Small Neighborhood Sign Companies.
Many times these types of sign companies are found in strip malls, retail outlets
and small industrial buildings. They usually don’t have large or complex equip-
ment and tend to specialize in less technical manufacturing techniques. They offer
fairly quick turnaround times and offer such signage as vinyl lettering for windows,
vehicle graphics or vehicle wraps, decal and banners. They may also manufacturer
sandblasted wooden signs, do screen printing or hand lettering. Usually these

12/2012 Page 2-28

 Sign Industry Need a Sign Program

Types of Sign companies are small, with just a few employees, and are often family owned and
Companies operated and specialize in only certain types of signs. These companies can often
be found in the phone book. They will most often list their specialty in their ad.
(continued)
These types of sign companies can be a resource for temporary signs, banners,
informational signs, event signs, etc. They are not equipped to manufacture and
install large-scale institutional sign projects for a VA facility.

Service and Lighting Company: These companies repair existing signs. They can
be called to repair a sign that is no longer illuminating or functioning properly. They
have service trucks and a staff familiar with sign construction and installation. They
can also repair parking lot and street lighting. Also some of these companies pro-
vide services to maintain facilities light fixtures, both inside and outside of buildings,
as well as parking lots and structures.

12/2012 Page 2-29

 Submittals Need a Sign Program

Submittal and Shop In the course of implementing a sign program, the first milestone is reviewing the
Drawing Check List sign company’s submittal of samples and shop drawings.

The following outline provides an overview of items to look for and check during the
submittal and shop drawing review. It should be noted that each project is different
so this guide cannot be all inclusive of every possible item to check.

It is recommended that the submittal and shop drawings review process be

conducted with a complete submittal, meaning, all samples and all drawings
are submitted at one time. Partial submittals can result in items being missed or
misunderstood.

If, in the review process, one has a question, needs more information, or wants a
clarification, the sooner in the submittal review process it’s raised the easier it is to
address. Once the submittal and shop drawings are approved, the sign company
takes that as authorization to proceed into manufacturing and any changes after
this point will usually result in a change order and additional cost.

Samples The quantity of samples submitted can vary for different projects, but a quantity
of 3 of each is recommended, as a minimum. This allow one set to be returned to
the manufacturer, when approved, one set to remain in the project master file, and
one set to be used by the designer, during the course of the project, for reference
purposes, meetings, field comparisons, etc. If the sign program is part of a renova-
tion project, additional copies are required. When reviewing the shop drawings,
the following considerations must be addressed before the shop drawings can be
considered complete:

1. Have all materials, colors and finishes been provided?

2. Are all colors and finishes labeled with their reference/color code and manu-
facturer name?
3. Are color submittals, samples and material finishes at least 6” x 6”. If there is a
grain, finish, pattern, or texture, is the direction indicated?
4. Have all the correct sign type samples been submitted?
5. On letters with a satin grain finish, is the direction of the grain on the letter
face indicated?
6. Verify the original material specifications have been met and not altered or
substituted with an inferior product.

Shop Drawings General – Both Exterior and Interior

The following items are applicable to the review of any sign program submittal, inte-
rior or exterior.

1. Do the drawings make sense? Are they logical, consistent and complete?
2. Are all sign types required for the job included and indicated in the drawings?
3. Are paint colors specified by color number, name and paint manufacturer? If
a custom color is mixed, is the added information of the formula included?
4. All the graphic symbols and type fonts should be noted.
5. All drawings need to be drawn in scale and the scale noted.

12/2012 Page 2-30

 Submittals Need a Sign Program

Shop Drawings 6. All sign face layouts need to be fully dimensioned with capital letter size,
(continued) interline spacing and margins. All Braille symbols need to be properly defined.
7. Are all code required and VA mandatory signs included?
8. On double sided signs, is the layout for each side shown and dimensioned?
9. Are the job colors, materials and finishes noted and correct for each sign?
10. Are the dimensions shown for each sign type and its components detailing
length, height and thickness?
11. Are the dimensions shown for the placement of all graphics on the sign?
12. Do the dimensions for the intended size and the placement of the graphics
add up?
13. Do the drawings clearly show how is the sign is assembled?
14. Do exterior signs that utilize adhesive in the assembly process identify the
type of adhesive (glue or tape) and the method of surface preparation?
15. Is the sign type installation specifically shown and detailed? Will it adequately
secure the sign to its intended location?
16. Are instructions provided for the correct cleaning methods of the signs?
17. Are instructions provided on maintenance of the signs (i.e., how to access
lamping for service, how to change directory strips, etc.)?
It is important to remember that shop drawings will become the file document that
will be used for future reference when servicing, repairing, updating or ordering new
signs. These drawings also become and important reference for future vendors who
may be trying to match new signs to existing signs.

Exterior General – Illuminated and Non-illuminated

The following items are applicable to the review of any exterior sign program
submittal:

1. All signs over 8 feet require a structurally engineered footing (foundation). Do

the footing drawings have the structural engineers name and license/stamp
visible on the drawing? Are calculations provided to substantiate the founda-
tion design?
2. How is the sign connected to it’s footing?
3. Exterior signs with a visible concrete base must have the finish of the
exposed concrete identified.
4. Are all sign cabinets, structural posts, etc. fully dimensioned?
5. All signs over 8 feet require a structural engineering detail the internal sup-
port structure. The drawings must have the structural engineers name and
license/stamp visible on the drawing.
6. Exterior signs on private property (leased facilities) require building/sign per-
mits from the local city or county. The signs also require final inspections by
city or county inspectors and must be scheduled and performed the day of
the installation.
7. The shop drawings should clearly show where the signs are to be installed
with any field conditions noted that have a bearing on the sign location

12/2012 Page 2-31

 Submittals Need a Sign Program

Exterior (curbs, walks, electrical service point, underground utilities, etc.). These draw-
ings should be drawn in “plan-view” clearly noting street names, distance
(continued)
from sidewalks, streets, buildings and easements.
8. All hardware should be noted as being corrosion resistant.
9. Exterior signs that have dissimilar metals in contact with one another must
have isolating material between them.
10. Is the sign construction and installation method appropriate for the materials
used? (e.g., acrylic cannot be welded to steel.)
11. All exterior signs and letters that are attached to a building must show and
identify how the building penetrations are going to be sealed to prevent water
intrusion.
12. All exterior signs and letters must have a small spacer to slightly space the
sign off the wall to allow for water run-off and prevent streaking on the build-
ing surface.

Illuminated Exterior Signs

The following items are specifically applicable to the review of an illuminated exte-
rior sign program submittal:

1. On each electrical sign the service voltage required and circuit load should be
noted.
2. Sign footings for all electrical signs should show footing dimensions and
details regarding reinforcing steel and concrete. Does the footing design
require a structural engineer?
3. Exterior illuminated sign cabinets must show details on how the cabinet
opens for access to servicing internal lamping and components.
4. Internally illuminated signs illuminated with florescent lamping must identify
the size and type of lamp and ballast.
5. Internally illuminated signs illuminated with LED’s must identify the LED
manufacturer and the LED part number.
6. Internally illuminated signs illuminated with LED’s must show the placement
and position of the LED’s and the quantity being installed and note the light
color.
7. Internally illuminated signs illuminated with florescent lamping must show the
lamps position in the cabinet, the distance from the sign face and the number
of lamps installed as well as the lamp light color.
8. Where does electrical wiring needed to power the sign enter into the sign?
9. Large exterior illuminated sign cabinets sign faces should be hinged.
10. Where is the “UL sticker” located on the sign?
11. Where is the placement of the shut off switch and how does one access it?
12. The interior of an illuminated sign cabinet must be noted as being painted
with a reflective white finish.
13. Exterior illuminated signs with aluminum sign faces and routed-out text must
show the mechanical attachment of letter voids to the diffuser. Adhesive
attachment of the letter void is NOT an alternate construction method
because it will fail.

12/2012 Page 2-32

 Submittals Need a Sign Program

Exterior 14. Exterior illuminated signs with aluminum sign faces with routed-out text must
(continued) show how the mechanical attachment of the plastic diffuser is made to the
aluminum sign face. Adhesive attachment of the letter void is NOT an alter-
nate construction method because it will fail.
15. Illuminated letters must show the attachment points of the letters and to the
building surface and identify the type of hardware.
16. Is the depth and construction of the footing shown and detailed and
appropriate for the soil conditions where the sign is going to be installed?

Non-illuminated Exterior Signs

The following items are specifically applicable to a non-illuminated exterior sign
program submittal:

1. Sign footings for all signs should show footing dimensions and details
regarding concrete.
2. Is the depth and construction of the footing shown and detailed and appropri-
ate for the soil conditions where the sign is going to be installed?
3. The finish on the edges of letters needs to be noted.

Parking Lot Signs

Refer to the general and exterior sign list.

Parking Structure Signs

Refer to the general and exterior sign list.

1. Determine if the type of mounting hardware is suitable for the type of

construction used for the parking structure.
2. Any mechanical fasteners used in a post-tension construction structure need
to be coordinated with the structure’s construction drawings to ensure method
of attachment does not contact or effect the tension system.

12/2012 Page 2-33

 Submittals Need a Sign Program

Interior The following items are specifically applicable to the review of an interior sign pro-
gram submittal.

1. Interior sign method of mounting to wall surface should be noted and speci-
fied. Is the method appropriate for the wall surface?
2. Detail drawings for the directory strips needs to note material, size, margins
and layout for all directories.
3. What is the assembly method shown for interior signs that have component
parts?
4. Interior sign drawings must show the mounting placement on the wall, with
dimensions, for each type of sign.
5. The finish on the edges of letters must be noted.
6. Flag type signs should detail the method of mechanical attachment of the
sign to the wall.
7. For hanging and overhead signs, details must be provided showing the
mounting method and clearance height to the bottom of the sign for each
type of ceiling condition. Is the method of attachment appropriate?
8. Directory drawings must indicate how the inserts or strips are removed and
updated. Does the door swing open, lift off, slide off, etc.?

12/2012 Page 2-34

 Integrated
Wayfinding &
Recommended
Technologies

• The Integrated Wayfinding Experience

Model
• Assessment Criteria for Wayfinding
Systems
• Key Benefits of Wayfinding Technologies
for VA facilities
• Guiding Principles and Best Practices
• Solution Strategy Model
• Platform, Design and Operational
Strategies
• Gauging the Complexity of an
Environment

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Overview Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Need a New Visitors expect to be able to access navigation and wayfinding information, whether
Wayfinding System they are at home planning their journey, on their way to a facility, or walking down a
Incorporating corridor to their appointment.
Technology?
Traditionally, signs and maps have been the major tools to guide people through
an environment, and further chapters of this Guide explain the role of signage in
wayfinding.

An expanded definition of the term wayfinding recognizes that visitors use multiple
cues and tools to find their destination — from spatial relationships manifested by
the architecture to lighting and interior finishes.

A new class of wayfinding tools has emerged with the technology revolution. Global
positioning system (GPS) devices, websites, apps, and on-site touchscreens can
be effective tools to help people along their journey. The smartphone has become
our own personal navigation device.

This chapter defines wayfinding technology, its role in helping people find their way,
and recommendations for expanding current VA technology tools to serve wayfind-
ing needs. It also contains tools to gauge the complexity of an environment so that
decisions about deploying wayfinding technology can be made at the facility level.

VA can make visits easier by providing door-to-door directions and on-site tools
to guide people effortlessly to their destination, relieving Veterans of some of their
anxieties.

Integrated Wayfinding Wayfinding is an integral part of the overall visitor experience. For this reason,
Experience Model the solution to any wayfinding problem should be approached from the visitor’s
perspective. Beginning with the visitor’s point-of-view to assess and improve the
wayfinding experience parallels the Veteran-centric mission of VA and its strategic
goals to increase Veteran satisfaction.

The Experience Model is a framework for structuring both the wayfinding problem
and the solution. It is consists of seven steps, as shown in figure 1.

The problem and, ultimately, the solution are detailed within the first six steps, which
are representative of a typical visitor’s journey arriving at and traversing the facility.
Step seven refers to the critical efforts of training staff to give directions and main-
taining the wayfinding system as facilities change and grow.

The model allows us to evaluate wayfinding tools according to the role each plays
in a visitor’s journey, and to assess the overall effectiveness of a system based on
how much support a visitor has at any one step.

It is important to note that a successful wayfinding program provides tools across

various media at every point in the visitor’s journey. For example, some visitors pre-
fer to navigate with a printed map, while others choose to follow step-by-step direc-
tions. An integrated wayfinding system provides redundant tools across media to
help people navigate in whatever manner they prefer.

The term “integrated” means that all wayfinding tools share the same informa-
tion — most importantly, the destination names — so that visitors can use any tool
in the wayfinding program at any point on their journey to find their destination. An
integrated wayfinding system utilizes the same nomenclature, wayfinding logic, and
visual language across each element in the system. When a wayfinding system is
not integrated, a visitor may receive an appointment letter with directions to “X-Ray”
and yet the signs in the facility direct to “Imaging,” resulting in confusion.
12/2012 Page 2-1
 Overview Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Integrated Wayfinding The following diagram of the Integrated Wayfinding Experience Model refers to a
Experience Model journey to a healthcare facility, but the model’s seven steps are applicable to other
facility types.
(continued)
The Integrated Wayfinding Experience Model Summary
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Get Find the Enter the Enter the Get Navigate Train and
Information Campus/ Campus/ Building Directions and Return Maintain
Site Site
Prior to Use road- Find Find the Get direc- Self- Train staff
departure, way signs, appropriate appropriate tions to a navigate to on the
learn where perimeter parking building destination a destina- system
to go and signs, and/ area, valet, entry. by using tion or desti- and keep
understand or GPS to shuttle, signs, maps, nations and the system
parking/ find the drop-off or or tools, or return to up - to - date
transit campus. Emergency by asking car, valet, or and
Figure 1 options. entry. staff. other mode accurate.
The Experience Model of transit.

A closer look at steps one through six reveals the expectations visitors have at each
point in their journey and what type of wayfinding tools they might use. For step
seven, it is important to identify the requirements of the institution and the tools that
support those expectations. Again, we have used a healthcare visit in this example.
Signage tools mentioned below are further defined in later chapters.

Step 1: Get Information

Visitor Expectations
Visitors expect to receive information from their healthcare provider about their
appointments, including the street address of the facility, parking options, and direc-
tions to the destination (including floor and room name and/or number).

Sample Tools
a. Call Center: a phone number to call to get appointment and wayfinding informa-
tion. Features may include the ability to email or text directions and maps.

b. New Patient Packet: appointment letter with directions and a map to the appoint-
ment and parking/transit options.

c. Wayfinding Website: a feature on the institution’s website to generate custom driv-

ing, parking, and walking direction to the appointment. Website also optimized for
smartphone and tablet use. Visitors can email, text, or print directions and maps.

d. Third-party Mapping Websites and Apps: patients may print or email directions
from sites such as Google (market leader with 83 percent market share as of
December 2013) or Bing (10 percent as of December 2013).

e. Car- or smartphone-based GPS: visitors may enter the street address in their
GPS to navigate.

Step 2: Find the Campus/Site

Visitor Expectations
Motorists need reinforcement that they are headed toward the campus/site, and
they must recognize when they have arrived on the property.

12/2012 Page 2-2

 Overview Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Integrated Wayfinding Sample Tools

Experience Model a. Department of Transportation and City-owned Roadway Signage.
(continued)
b. Gateways and Thresholds: identify the site and welcome visitors at its perimeter.

c. Campus and Building Identification Signs.

d. Car- or smartphone-based GPS: visitors may enter the street address in their
GPS to navigate.

Step 3: Enter the Campus/Site

Visitor Expectations
Motorists need big, clear, explicit cues and information that can be easily read from
a distance.

Sample Tools
a. Vehicular and Pedestrian Wayfinding Signs: directing to buildings and parking
options.

b. Building and Parking Identification Signs.

Step 4: Enter the Building

Visitor Expectations
Visitors need to locate the right building entry from the parking garage, parking lot,
or from the street. When there are multiple entrances, they need to find the one
closest to their destination.

Sample Tools
a. Building Entry Identification.

Step 5: Get Directions

Visitor Expectations
Visitors must intuitively make sense of the environment, orient themselves, and see
helpful resources that they can use; the wayfinding system must respond to what
they know.

Sample Tools
a. Entrance Lobby Information Desk: a prominent, staffed location where visitors
can ask for directions, pick up a map or visitors’ guide, or personalized directions.

b. Printed Map: a facility or campus map and directory of major destinations.

c. Visitors’ Guide: a more detailed version of the printed map, with department
phone directory and additional information on services and amenities.

d. Custom Route Maps: pre-printed route cards to major destinations or pre-printed

maps that a staff member highlights with custom directions.

e. Wayfinding and/or Check-In Kiosks: well-placed self-service interactive kiosks

where visitors can check in for appointments, get directions, or perform other per-
sonalized transactions.

f. Interior Navigation by Smartphone: to provide interior walking directions and you-

are-here capabilities for visitors.

12/2012 Page 2-3

 Overview Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Integrated Wayfinding g. Wayfinding Website: accessible by smartphone/tablet to access directions and

Experience Model nearby amenities.
(continued) Step 6: Navigate
Visitor Expectations
Visitors must confidently navigate to and from their destination, and they expect
reinforcement and guidance at frequent intervals. Information should be progres-
sively disclosed to prevent inundating the visitor with too much information at any
one point in their journey.

Sample Tools
a. Wayfinding and/or Check-In Kiosks: placed at decision points such as elevator
lobbies and destinations such as clinic waiting rooms.

b. Orientation and Directional Signage: wall- and/or ceiling-mounted signs that help
people navigate all the public areas of the facility.

c. Floor Directories: to identify all public destinations on each floor.

d. Department and Clinic Identification Signage: to identify public destinations.

e. Interior Navigation by Smartphone: to provide interior walking directions and you-

are-here capabilities for visitors.

f. Wayfinding Website: accessible by smartphone/tablet to access directions and

nearby amenities.

Step 7: Train and Maintain

Visitor Expectations
An overarching expectation of visitors is that all the wayfinding information they
interact with, such as directions from staff members or on signs, maps, and other
tools, are accurate and up-to-date.

Institutional Requirements
Roles have been defined to manage the wayfinding system, its content, and all
its public-facing tools. Administrative procedures and tools have been designed to
help maintain the system, and staff have been trained and are knowledgeable and
helpful.

Sample Tools
a. A centralized repository to manage wayfinding content such as building, depart-
ment, and destination names.

b. Procedures for updating the elements of the wayfinding system when there is a
change such as a department move, temporary construction re-routing, or a name
change.

c. Training for staff members (“wayfinding managers”) to maintain the repository and
the elements of the system.

d. Training for general staff on the wayfinding logic, how to give directions, and how
to introduce wayfinding tools to visitors.

More specific recommendations for maintenance and training will be detailed in the
section on Wayfinding Technology Strategy.

12/2012 Page 2-4

 Assessment Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Integrated Wayfinding Potential Usage of Wayfinding Technology across the

Experience Model Visitor’s Journey
(continued)
Because the focus of this section is the role of emerging technologies in wayfinding,
it is helpful to highlight the technology-based tools and their relevance at each step
in the visitor’s journey (steps 1-6) in figure 2.

1 2 3 4 5 6
Get Find the Enter the Enter the Get Directions Navigate and
Information Campus/Site Campus/Site Building Return
Wayfinding website
Third - Party websites + apps

Figure 2 GPS
On-site interactive kiosks
Emerging Technology in the
Experience Model Interior navigation by smartphone or tablet

Note that GPS applications and third-party websites and apps focus on public
property, with the exception of Google Indoors, which will be explained further in
the section on Related VA Initiatives. On-site kiosks, by definition, are specifically
an aid to navigating when you are at the facility, although they could direct to other
facilities as well.

Assessment Criteria In conjunction with the Integrated Wayfinding Experience model described above,
for Wayfinding a series of questions have been developed to help VA staff assess how successful
Systems a given wayfinding system may be. These criteria can be used to pinpoint specific
points of weakness for further examination.

Reflecting the emphasis on the Veteran-centered approach, seven of the ten criteria
evaluate the system from the visitor’s perspective; three evaluate the system from
the perspective of administration and operations.

From the Visitor’s Perspective

1. Is the experience of navigating the environment intuitive?
Are you aware that you’ve arrived at the right place?

Is there a sense of place? Do you feel welcomed?

Are there coherent vehicular and pedestrian pathways?

Are the technology tools promoted prominently (on-site and on the facility’s
website)?

Are the technology tools helpful and intuitive to use?

2. As a first time visitor, is it easy to access the tools you need?

Is there an information desk, information kiosk, and/or greeter at the entrance?

Are on-site technology tools well situated and accessible?

Are tools provided in the population’s main languages?

Are technology tools properly maintained and supported? (Do the printers work,
for example?)

3. Is the language friendly, accessible, and consistent?

12/2012 Page 2-5

 Assessment Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Assessment Criteria Are destination names easy to understand (no acronyms or medical jargon)?
for Wayfinding
Systems Does the name of the destination on the sign match that on the website and on
patient letters, printed maps, and all other wayfinding material?
(continued)
When symbols or icons are used, are they easy to understand and remember?

4. Is the wayfinding information up-to-date and accurate?

Do directions and maps reflect construction and temporary closures?

Are there “hand-made” signs that differ from the permanently-installed signs?

Is all wayfinding information proactively managed and updated?

5. Are amenities (restrooms, cafés, etc.) easy to find?

If the wayfinding system uses landmarks, such as named elevators or spaces,
are they easy to identify and remember?
6. Are the functions of technology tools simple to learn?
Do the technology tools share a common user experience and visual
vocabulary?

Are the technology tools accessible to low-vision, hearing impaired, and wheel-
chair-bound visitors?

Is there someone able to help a visitor use the technology?

From the Facility Administration Perspective

7. Is the wayfinding system easy to maintain (the physical components
as well as the content)?
Are wayfinding roles and responsibilities clearly defined?

Is all wayfinding information centralized and “published” to various tools?

When a department is relocated, how quickly are the wayfinding tools updated?

Are the technology tools deeply integrated into relevant systems?

8. Is the wayfinding system seen as a vital contributor to the patient

experience?
Is there an approved roadmap that details enhancements and updates?

Is there a maintenance budget available for updates that fall outside defined
projects?

Do patient satisfaction surveys ask about wayfinding?

9. Are staff well-trained in using the wayfinding system, its tools, and its
nomenclature?
Is wayfinding training a part of new employee orientation?

10. Is there a defined role of “wayfinding manager” responsible for the

system and its content?
Is the wayfinding manager knowledgeable about upcoming construction, expan-
sion, and renovation projects?

Answers to these questions may trigger further research to resolve problems. For
example, if there are many “hand-made” signs in a facility and unclear wayfinding

12/2012 Page 2-6

 Benefits Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Assessment Criteria responsibilities among the staff, next steps may be to determine how frequently
for Wayfinding wayfinding information changes at that facility and to identify a point-person to take
Systems on the “wayfinding manager” role. Further strategies are defined in the upcoming
(continued) section on Wayfinding Technology Strategy.

Key Benefits of The last few sections have dealt with technology tools as components of an inte-
Wayfinding Technology grated wayfinding system. But what are the benefits of implementing wayfinding
for VA Facilities technology solutions in and of themselves for VA facilities? Six major benefits have
been identified.

1. The ubiquity of the Internet and smartphones have dramatically

increased expectations of visitors to access information themselves,
where and when they need it.
VA leadership explains this shift and a commitment to address these needs in the
Department of Veterans Affairs FY 2014-2020 Strategic Plan:

Communications and information technology (IT) will continue to reshape the

world. Like the general public, the communication preferences of Veterans and
eligible beneficiaries and their families are changing. Veterans and eligible
beneficiaries increasingly expect to receive VA communications via the Internet
and on mobile devices. VA must embrace and fully support changing mobile
lifestyles and personalize that interaction to Veteran needs at that time and
place. VA must be able to collect and analyze data to understand our client’s
needs and expectations, and personalize the Veteran’s experience with VA. VA
needs to be able to adapt to and keep up with the rate of technological change.
(page 15)

We live in a connected world. The rapid pace of technological advancement is

reshaping Veteran’s expectation regarding how services, benefits, and support
should be delivered. Today’s client expects instant access to information and
self-service options via the Internet, and increasingly through mobile devices
like tablets and smartphones (and the next generation “smart” devices that are
yet to be deployed). (page 24)

2. In an era when healthcare choices are expanding — for Veterans as

well as for all Americans — offerings that improve patient satisfaction are
a competitive advantage.
Medical centers that have adopted wayfinding technology, such as Kaiser
Permanente, see it as an increased commitment to serving their communities.

When Kaiser Permanente undertook a broad research initiative to understand the

needs of their members (entitled “Creating the Total Healthcare Environment”), two
key findings emerged that underscored the relevance of wayfinding technology:

a. The need for understanding the efficiency of the journey to the medical
center and point of service… Members expressed the desire to have efficient
communication systems for understanding the reception and copay processes,
flow, and queuing, and navigating the wayfinding systems for guidance to their
locations.

b. The need for convenience, efficiency, and timeliness of service and care.
Members are keenly aware of the amount of time invested in waiting, and the
uncertainty about when they will be summoned. As stated above, members
view this waiting time relative to the whole of their journey. (Creating the Total
Health Environment, June 2010, page 21)

12/2012 Page 2-7

 Benefits Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Key Benefits of This second point touches on a way that wayfinding technology can assist in the
Wayfinding Technology larger mission of integrative care.
for VA Facilities
Patient satisfaction is a major part of the total brand experience. A successful way-
(continued) finding system can provide a consistent and tangible expression of the institution’s
brand and values. A VA-wide branding effort is underway to articulate and reinforce
the brand of VA and its services. For example, VHA interior designers are working
with an internal branding team to extend the brand into environments like clinics
and hospitals in order to emphasize VA’s mission of patient-centered care. For VA,
a coherent set of wayfinding technology tools can support and convey the brand as
Veterans and visitors are guided to their destinations.

3. When patients can access a “live” view of their appointments and how
to get to them through a kiosk, website, or their smartphone, their time
at the healthcare facility can be more efficiently managed.
Appointments can be rescheduled, additional appointments can be added, such as
a lab test or a specialist consult, and integrative care can be achieved. Wayfinding
technology can support this more complicated patient flow.

The Patient Aligned Care Team (PACT) model that VA employs is primed to take
advantage of enhanced scheduling and real-time communication tools such as
MyHealtheVet. It is instructive to describe a potential future case, in which PACT
supported by wayfinding may speed diagnosis and treatment:

At 10am, a Veteran visits a primary care provider at a CBOC, where during an

annual check-up an irregular heartbeat is discovered. The physician performs
an electrocardiogram in the exam room and determines that further tests are
needed. Those tests are conducted at the VAMC nearby. The clerk schedules
the first of these tests for 1pm the same day. The Veteran has never been to
the VAMC, so the clerk emails the time and location of the new appointment to
the Veteran’s email address. A link to driving, parking, and walking directions to
Imaging are included in the email. The Veteran reads the email on his smart-
phone (preferred communication method as chosen on MyHealtheVet) and fol-
lows directions to the second appointment.

4. A more agile approach to wayfinding, in which wayfinding content can

be updated and immediately published to devices, ensures that visitors
can navigate an ever - changing environment.
VA facilities are in a constant state of flux from construction, renovation , and relo-
cation. In 2015 alone, one billion dollars in major and minor construction is planned.
Also included in FY 2015 will be approximately 30 new CBOCs coming on line,
mainly through the VA leasing program.

In such variable conditions, the best way to manage change is through a content
management system, where changes are identified, impacts to static signage can
be quantified, and updated content can be delivered to websites, kiosks, and other
tools, all in sync with construction and relocation schedules.

5. In addition to its less tangible benefits of increased patient satisfac-

tion, the benefits of wayfinding technology can be quantified.
VHA’s Veterans Point of Service Program (VPS) designs, develops, and deploys
self-service devices such as VetLink kiosks that provide beneficiaries and employ-
ees with clinical and business transactions. Just as a return on investment (ROI)
exercise was undertaken by VHA for VPS, ROI could be calculated for the adoption
of wayfinding technology. Based on the specific functionality of the recommended

12/2012 Page 2-8

 Benefits Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Key Benefits of system and its costs, an assessment of its net impact could be estimated, with fac-
Wayfinding Technology tors such as:
for VA Facilities
• decrease in patients who are late for appointments because they are lost or at
(continued) the wrong location.

• decrease in staff time giving directions.

• decrease in no-shows because patients are lost.

• more efficient management and update of signage.

6. It is an opportune time to identify strategies for wayfinding technology

because systems can leverage existing initiatives and programs that are
underway at VACO, VHA, and NCA.
Some current VA initiatives are closely aligned to wayfinding, such as the VA
Patient-Centered System Navigation Work Group. Others provide existing platforms
that can be expanded to publish wayfinding information, such as the VetLink kiosks
and VAMC websites. The VetLink kiosk project also provides pertinent lessons
learned in the deployment of self-service technology, from planning pilot projects to
identifying Integrated Project Team (IPT) members to support the endeavors.

12/2012 Page 2-9

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and Guiding principles provide the foundation for all best practices, strategies, and tac-
Best Practices tics within a given area of study. The Guiding Principles for wayfinding innovation
at VA facilities define what is truly important for a wayfinding system’s success and
frame the recommendations that follow. The six Guiding Principles are:

1. Tell visitors what they need to know, when they need to know it, and in the
medium they prefer.
2. Maintain consistent nomenclature — the system of names and symbols used
to direct visitors to destinations — across all wayfinding tools.
3. From planning through implementation, assure that the wayfinding system
addresses the specific needs of the facility and those of its visitors.
4. Design a system that is sustainable, easy to update, and extensible as facili-
ties change and grow.
5. Use cost-effective high-impact solutions, leveraging and extending assets
and platforms as possible.
6. From the start, create a management plan that identifies the people, pro-
cesses and tools to keep wayfinding content accurate and technology
operational.
These Guiding Principles are a product of research which included site visits and
interviews with staff at VA and comparable institutions.

• Visits to five non-VA healthcare institutions with innovative wayfinding:

Houston Methodist Hospital
The University of Texas, MD Anderson Cancer Center
Mountain View Center Palo Alto Medical Foundation (Sutter Health)
Kaiser Permanente (KP) Oakland Medical Center
University of California San Francisco (UCSF) Medical Center,
Parnassus Campus and Mission Bay Campus

• Visits with three vendors of wayfinding technology:

22 Miles
Google
Connexient (via web conference)

• Visits to two VA Medical Centers:

Michael E. DeBakey VA Medical Center, Houston, Texas
VA Palo Alto Health Care System, Palo Alto, California

• Visit to one VA National Cemetery:

Golden Gate National Cemetery, San Francisco, California

• Interviews with the Wayfinding Workgroup and other VA stakeholders

• Primary research on wayfinding technologies and innovations
In addition to the site visits and primary research, the findings from industry exper-
tise and user research studies (empirical data and user perceptions) along with
academic and industry research have contributed to the findings.

The Guiding Principles provide context when designing the solutions outlined in
the Recommended Strategies section and should be applied at the beginning of all
relevant projects to guide decision-making.

12/2012 Page 2-10

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and Associated with each of the Guiding Principles are Best Practices: methods and
Best Practices techniques that have proven to deliver effective and productive solutions. When
(continued) available, examples demonstrate how the Best Practices have informed a project.

Guiding Principles and Best Practices Matrix

1 2 3 4 5 6
GUIDING PRINCIPLES
Tell visitors Maintain con- From planning Design a Use cost- From the start,
what they sistent nomen- through imple- system that effective create a man-
need to know, clature — the mentation, is sustain- high - impact agement plan
when they system of assure that able, easy to solutions, that identifies
need to know names and the wayfind- update, and leveraging the people,
it, and in the symbols used ing system extensible and extending processes
medium they to direct visi- addresses the as facilities assets and and tools to
prefer. tors to destina- specific needs change and platforms as keep wayfind-
tions — across of the facility grow. possible. ing content
all wayfinding and those of accurate and
tools. its visitors. technology
operational.

BEST PRACTICES
Provide way- Help people Gauge the Begin with a Build upon Leverage cur-
finding guid- find what they complex- list of desired VA.gov web- rently - defined
ance along the are looking ity of your features, not a sites’ Location duties and
visitor’s com- for by match- environment product-selec- and Directions consolidate
plete journey, ing approved and develop tion process. sections, similar respon-
starting from nomenclature relevant tools VPS VetLink sibilities into
home. to common accordingly. platform, and a wayfinding
nicknames. the Google manager role.
Indoors
initiative.
People prefer Use interna- Design for Develop an Stand-alone, Train front - line
to use familiar tional symbols the first-time integrated proprietary staff how to
technology developed by visitor. wayfinding wayfinding give directions
and common the AIGA and solution kiosks and and how to
interaction ISO. roadmap. apps are not use wayfinding
methods. viable or effec- tools.
tive solutions
for large - scale
organizations
comparable
to VA.
Verbal direc- Serve your A visitor- Focus on
tions aren’t community friendly map building a
enough — in relevant should be robust content
people need a languages. designed for repository,
guide. every large- publishing to
scale and/or platforms as
hard-to-nav- they become
igate facility viable.
and provided
as paper maps
and download-
able maps
from the facil-
ity’s website.
Mobile has Prototype,
emerged as test, monitor,
the primary and survey to
wayfinding find out what
platform. works and
what doesn’t.

12/2012 Page 2-11

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and Guiding Principle 1: Tell visitors what they need to know,
Best Practices when they need to know it, and in the medium they prefer.
(continued) It is easy to overwhelm visitors with too much information. The concept of progres-
sive disclosure — giving people just enough information to complete the current
segment of their journey — has been proven to make complex environments simpler
to navigate.

There is no single most effective wayfinding tool. Signs, maps, directories, kiosks,
apps, and websites must all work together in concert to provide information to visi-
tors in the platform and medium that they choose to consult. Visitors often use a
variety of tools on a single journey.

Best Practices
A. Provide wayfinding guidance along the visitor’s complete journey,
starting from home.
Example

On their websites, MD Anderson Cancer Center (access.mdanderson.org) and

UCSF Medical Center (pathway.ucsfmedicalcenter.org) provide driving, parking,
and walking directions to all public destinations. Directions are optimized to pro-
vide the best place to park to reach that destination. From their homes, visitors
can generate a customized, full direction set and print or email it to themselves.

Facilities that only provide on-site kiosks do not fulfill this need: getting from
home to the destination. VAMC staff report that Veterans may go to the wrong
facility for their appointment, since there is often more than one VHA facility in
the area. It is critical to provide accurate driving and transit directions in all com-
munications to the patient and on the medical center’s website.

The Integrated Wayfinding Experience Model described in the previous section

identifies all the steps of a journey and can help identify gaps.

B. People prefer to use familiar technology and common interaction

methods.
In 2014, the most familiar and most-utilized technologies are the web and the
smartphone. Touchscreen kiosks, such as ATMs, self - checkout at the super-
market, airport check-in, and gas station pumps are part of daily life too.

However, there are no standards in the user interface design for a kiosk, unlike
the codified user interface guidelines for an operating system. This means that
there is a learning curve associated with every interaction with a new touch-
screen kiosk. The user interface should be simply designed, tested at the pro-
totype stage, and revised during the design and development phases to ensure
high levels of usability.

12/2012 Page 2-12

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and The most successful kiosk implementations are built to serve a single, concise
Best Practices function that can be completed in about a minute or two. Information and com-
(continued) merce transactions should be simple and helpful.

C. Verbal directions are not enough — people need a guide.

Example

In a 2011 user research study at New York-Presbyterian Weill Cornell Medical

Center, researchers sat at the main information desk and asked visitors what
they brought with them to help them find their way. The abundance of hand-
written notes confirmed that the majority of directions were given verbally.
Directions were often inconsistent, incomplete or inaccurate, causing confusion
and anxiety. The medical center staff decided to publish a visitor guide and
distribute it to physicians’ offices, information desks, and clinics to arm patients
with a pocket-sized source of accurate information.

Whether it is an internally-produced one-page main floor map and directory or a

professionally printed reference guide, visitors appreciate and use paper guides
to navigate with confidence through unfamiliar places.
WHAT DO VISITORS
Mapping ACTUALLY
strategies BRING
are further TO THE in
described HOSPITAL?
the VA Signage Design Guide sec-
tion “You are Here Maps and Directories.”
Findings
The abundance of
notes confirms that
of instructions are g

Problems
Inconsistency, varie
inaccuracies occur
Info Desk staff mus
scribbles into actio
instructions

D. Mobile has emerged as the primary wayfinding platform.

As stated in the Department of Veterans Affairs FY 2014 - 2020 Strategic Plan:
NYP WAYFINDING COMMUNICATIONS JULY 14, 2011

We are an online and mobile society; physical proximity is no longer a con-

straint to communicating, whether to converse with family and friends or to
purchase goods and services… We are increasingly using mobile devices to
conduct our online interactions. Global mobile data traffic in 2012 was nearly
12 times greater than the total global Internet traffic in 2000. (pages 14 - 15)

As of January 2014, the Pew Research Internet Project reports that 90 percent
of American adults have a cell phone and 58 percent of American adults have a
smartphone. Age and economic factors are diminishing. Additionally, 74 percent
of adult smartphone owners ages 18 and older say they use their phone to get
directions or other information based on their current location.

12/2012 Page 2-13

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and

Best Practices
(continued)

74 percent of adult smartphone owners ages 18 and older say they use their phone to get directions or
other information based on their current location.

12/2012 Page 2-14

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and Guiding Principle 2: Maintain consistent nomenclature — 

Best Practices the system of names and symbols used to direct visitors to
(continued) destinations — across all wayfinding tools.
The importance of using consistent language, especially in a complex healthcare
environment, cannot be overstated. When the same destination is referred to as
“Diagnostic Imaging” on an appointment letter, “Radiology” on signs, “X-Ray” by the
information desk attendant, the visitor is sure to be confused. The deliberate act
of documenting and enforcing a single vocabulary of names yields great improve-
ments in wayfinding.

Inconsistent names arise from the lack of a centralized approach to wayfinding. An

interior designer or facilities manager may be responsible for signage and volunteer
services may manage the printed maps. A centralized database, or a single spread-
sheet for smaller facilities, can house the approved nomenclature, which can be
shared across the organization to use in all public communications.

Best Practices
A. Help people find what they are looking for by matching approved
nomenclature to common nicknames.
Example

At the UCSF Medical Centers, the wayfinding manager uses a custom-built

web-based application to manage all wayfinding content as well as the wayfind-
ing website and touchscreens. From her desk, she can run reports that list what
people searched for on the website and touchscreens but did not generate any
results. On a regular basis, she culls this report to find nicknames or aliases for
UCSF destinations and adds those to the database. Every official name of a
Help people find what they are looking for by matching your
destination can be associated with up to ten nicknames. This allows visitors to
nomenclature
get results and to common
directions, evennicknames
when they do not know the one official name of
the destination.

A search for... results in...

eyecare Ophthalmology
heart center Cardiac Center
xray Radiology
registration Admissions
coffee Starbucks
ENT Otolaryngology

This is a great advantage of using technology for wayfinding. Once the official
name is finalized, the system can also hold other names that refer to that
destination. © 2014 FD2S INC.

B. Use international symbols developed by the AIGA and ISO.

The AIGA (founded as the American Institute of Graphic Arts) and the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) have codified a set of
internationally recognizable symbols for objects, places, and navigation. While
other organizations have produced customized icons which may or may not
be understood easily the symbol sets from AIGA and ISO remain the standard
and should be used consistently in signage and all wayfinding technology
applications.

12/2012 Page 2-15

 38TH

A
HOW

ONT
3784

BROAD
Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

PIEDM
Broadway
MRI

WAY
Guiding Principles and C. Serve your community in relevant languages.
急診入口
Best Practices Example
(continued)
Kaiser Permanente Oakland Medical Center offers a printed visitor guide in
English, Chinese, and Spanish, 280the major languages of the populations they
serve. KP also 病人出院
chose to embed wayfinding touchscreens 3772
in the3779
two entrance
3701 W MacArthur Blvd
lobbies and at all elevator lobbies. The touchscreens offer
Howe St the same language
Piedmont
Ave
options. Multilingual offerings are a priority for KP, and their National
Broadway Facilities
Services manages all translations for patient communications.
LVD
ART HUR B
W MAC

路線
大樓入口
新醫院
3600 (訂於2014年夏季落成啟用) 醫院
Mosswood 急診部
Broadway
Park 診所
新專科診所
ical Center 問訊
藥房
Broadway 餐廳與販賣機
Mosswood Refresh咖啡座
禮品店
3505
停車設施
殘障通行入口

地圖未按實際比例

OaklandToMedical
offer multilingual
Center capabilities on websites, apps, and touchscreen kiosks,
the requirements must be detailed at the start of the project. Adding a second
280 W. MacArthur Blvd., Oakland, CA 94611
language to an existing English application is less efficient and more costly.
Machine translations, such as Google, are not yet at the level of accuracy to be
dependable. Interpreters and translators should be consulted on all language
and associated cultural issues.

Guiding Principle 3: From planning through implementation,

assure that the wayfinding system addresses the specific
needs of the facility and those of its visitors.
Buildings are planned to serve distinct purposes and to support specific activities
that are performed inside their walls. A hospital is designed to house all the people,
processes, and equipment engaged in the healing process. A business office is
designed to serve customers and process their transactions. A successful wayfind-
ing system is tailored to the flow of people in the environment and to the size and/or
complexity of the environment itself.

Best Practices
A. Gauge the complexity of your environment and develop relevant tools
accordingly.
It is important to understand how complicated a facility is before determining a
wayfinding strategy to help visitors navigate that environment. Some facilities
have simple visitor-flow patterns. A VA Regional Benefits Office, for example,
may simply consist of a waiting room and adjoining offices for meetings with
Veterans. Its wayfinding needs may be simple compared to a VA Medical
Center, where Veterans navigate to an average of three clinics or offices during
one visit.

A series of questions to help determine the relative complexity of a given facility

is provided in the section “Gauging the Complexity of the Environment.”

12/2012 Page 2-16

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and B. Design for the first-time visitor.

Best Practices Example
(continued)
A VHA Interior Designer noted that she and her colleagues have informally
tested the efficacy of their wayfinding systems by asking friends, family mem-
bers, and university students to find their way to destinations at VA medical
centers. Facility staff members know their environment so well, it is important
to find ways to see the lobbies, corridors, and clinics through the eyes of a first-
time visitor.

When it comes to employing wayfinding technology, it is even more important to

design for people who are new to the system. There is a certain wariness about
interacting with a new kiosk, device, or app for the first time, and if that interac-
tion is unsatisfying, the majority of users will not try it again.

C. A visitor-friendly map should be designed for every large - scale and/or

hard - to - navigate facility and provided as paper maps and downloadable
maps from the facility’s website.
Examples

Some VHA facilities have produced their own maps and visitor guides;
examples include VA Hudson Valley Healthcare System, Baltimore VA Medical
Center, and VA Palo Alto Healthcare System. These maps are offered as down-
loadable documents from the facilities’ websites as well as at information desks.

As noted above, research has proven that people navigate more confidently
when they have something to refer to, such as a map. As usage of smartphones
approaches ubiquity, that “something” may be their smartphone and the web,
but until that point, a paper map is a trusty aid.

Mapping strategies are further described in the VA Signage Design Guide sec-
tion “You are Here Maps and Directories.”

All wayfinding information, maps, and visitor guides require maintenance and
update planning, as explained in the following guiding principle.

It is also important to note that the size and complexity of a facility should
inform the relevance of wayfinding technology for that visitor population. A
series of questions to help determine the relative complexity of a given facility
is provided in the section “Gauging the Complexity of the Environment” later in
this section.

12/2012 Page 2-17

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and

Best Practices
(continued)

Basement
Floor Legend
Radiation Oncology
Information
Elevators
Stairs
Radiation Waiting Area
Oncology
Restrooms
Vending
Nurses Station
Restricted Access

First
Floor
Agent Cashier
DAV Transportation Emergency Dept.
Eligibility & Check In
Enrollment Center Emergency
Entrance
Emergency Department Only
Check-In Primary Care Primary Care Emergency Dept.
Check-In 2 Check-In 1 Waiting
Emergency Department
Waiting
Information Desk Outpatient
Primary Lab Agent Social Workers
Lab Check-In Care Check-In Eligibility &
Entrollment DAV Cashier
Waiting
Outpatient Social Workers Center Transportation
Information
Pharmacy Police Desk
Police Desk Service Parking
Radiology Garage Police Main
Police Service Waiting Elevators Desk Entrance

Primary Care Check-In 1

Radiology Check-In Escalator to
Primary Care Check-In 2 Cat Scan 2nd Floor
MRI
Primary Care Waiting Nuclear Medicine Patient & Visitor Pharmacy
Radiology Check-In Elevators

• CAT Scan
• MRI
• Nuclear Medicine
Radiology Waiting

4
Guiding Principle 4: Design a system that is sustainable,
easy to update, and extensible as facilities change and grow.
The one constant in healthcare environments is change, and VHA facilities are
no exception. Systems to support wayfinding technology must be designed to
evolve in tandem with the facilities they track and the visitors they serve. Closed,
proprietary products do not thrive in environments such as these. Solutions for VA
facilities must be modular and able to integrate into other systems so that data can
remain consistent across all the applications that use that data. For example, an

12/2012 Page 2-18

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and appointment management database should receive a feed of destination names
Best Practices and their locations from the wayfinding database. When a destination moves, its
(continued) destination will be automatically updated in patient appointment records.

Best Practices
A. Begin with a list of desired features, not a product - selection process:
determine needs first and then evaluate potential solutions based on
how they address the needs.
Example

As part of the development of a new campus-wide wayfinding program, New

York University (NYU) Langone Medical Center identified the need to add addi-
tional wayfinding support for non-English speakers. Printed maps in multiple
languages were available, but there was concern that the English-only signs on
the first floor provided little help to their large Russian, Chinese, and Spanish
speaking population. Instead of sourcing a product, such as a digital sign sys-
tem, the wayfinding team wrote the requirements as an Request for Proposal
(RFP). The winning bidder was a team that brought digital signage hardware
and software development capabilities to solve the unique problem. The result
is an interactive touchscreen embedded in a directional sign that scrolls direc-
tions to first floor destinations in the three languages plus English. Content is
pulled from the institution’s centralized database.

While some vendors have tried to productize wayfinding technology for specific
vertical markets, the market is young and their standard feature sets most likely
will be insufficient to match the needs of VA visitors and staff. In following VA’s
Veteran-centric approach, it is best to itemize the desired features of the system
and evaluate systems based on those criteria.

B. Develop an integrated wayfinding solution roadmap.

Example

The Veterans Point of Service (VPS) team manages the VetLink platform of
self-service kiosks at VHA facilities. The VPS Product manages a team of
project managers who draft requirements for new features and enhancements.
Approved features get scheduled into a series of upcoming releases (2 per
year for 2014 and 2015). This roadmap ensures that VetLink remains an integral
platform with increasing functionality and that it addresses a larger collection of
Veterans’ needs over time

12/2012 Page 2-19

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and

Best Practices
(continued)

Wayfinding technology is most successful when it is not a one-time project, but

an investment that is continually assessed and enhanced over time.

C. Focus on building a robust content repository, publishing to platforms

as they become viable.
Example

MD Anderson launched its integrated wayfinding system in 2004, three years

before the introduction of the iPhone. At launch, the centralized database drove
the wayfinding website and on-site touchscreen kiosks. In 2013, when MD
Anderson’s Marketing department started development of a mobile app, they
were able to integrate an existing data feed from the wayfinding database and
develop a “Get Directions” feature with relative ease.

12/2012 Page 2-20

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and It is difficult to plan for the adoption of new technologies and devices more than
Best Practices five years into the future. However, when the center of the system is a database
(continued) of accurate content, that content can be published to various devices as they
gain traction in the marketplace.

D. Prototype, test, monitor, and survey to find out what works and what
doesn’t.
Example

When designing the physical enclosure for their wayfinding kiosks, both MD
Anderson and NYU Langone Medical Center chose to create low-tech mock-
ups to test the accessibility and approachability of the kiosk. The foamcore
prototypes informed design refinements, such as ways to diminish glare and to
better broadcast the function of the kiosk.

Research activities, including user-testing and prototyping, are important dur-

ing the planning phase of technology projects. It is also critical to institutional-
ize some research methods so that ongoing performance can be measured.
Patient satisfaction surveys can be modified to include questions about way-
finding in general and about specific wayfinding tools.

Websites, apps, and kiosks allow for extensive usage reporting and other met-
rics. These reports can be helpful in determining the optimum number of kiosks.
If their usage is low, websites and apps may need to be promoted through
patient communication tools.

Guiding Principle 5: Use cost-effective high - impact

solutions, leveraging and extending assets and platforms as
possible.
Wayfinding is a small but impactful part of the Veteran’s experience at VA facilities.
As one VA staff member who is also a caregiver told us, “wayfinding is the differ-
ence between a good trip and a bad trip to the doctor.”

VA has invested in platforms and communication tools to serve Veterans and their
families. These same tools, because they were built to be extensible, offer great
opportunities to deliver wayfinding information in the context of the Veteran’s inter-
actions with VA.

Best Practices
A. Build upon VHA websites’ Location and Directions sections, VPS
VetLink platform, and the Google Indoors initiative.

12/2012 Page 2-21

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and Upon review of the related wayfinding and technology initiatives within VA,
Best Practices there are three platforms/assets that provide foundations for building wayfinding
(continued) resources for visitors.

VAMC websites already provide driving directions and links to maps to help
Veterans get to their facilities. These sections could be enhanced to provide
customized maps and information on interior wayfinding, consolidating all
wayfinding information for the facility in the one area. Implementing a system of
standardized destination nomenclature will be a key to a successful expansion
of directions on VAMC websites.

VetLink is positioned to be the centralized point of service for an expanding set

of Veteran interactions. Currently, VetLink includes an optional wayfinding mod-
ule with limited functionality. It has not been deployed in many sites. The VetLink
deployment currently numbers more than 3,315 kiosks in 95 VHA facilities. With
expanded directions capabilities, VetLink is poised to be the primary platform for
communicating on-site directions to Veterans and visitors.

Through the Google Indoors initiative VA has begun a working relationship with
the largest and most accurate provider of maps and directions. Google Indoors
is not yet marketed and promoted to Google users, so awareness of its features
is currently low. But, as Google achieves critical mass of floor plans, they are
sure to launch marketing and promotional efforts to introduce its capabilities to
their users.

B. Stand-alone, proprietary wayfinding kiosks and apps are not viable

solutions for large-scale organizations comparable to VA.
It is critical to understand the shortcomings of stand-alone wayfinding kiosks.
The majority of wayfinding kiosks that have been purchased on an ad hoc basis
by VAMCs are unsupported, not functioning and/or not providing up-to-date
information. It is recommended that VA consider a moratorium on the purchase
of proprietary wayfinding kiosks and instead invest in the expansion of current
systems to provide wayfinding functionality to Veterans and their families.

Guiding Principle 6: From the start, create a management

plan that identifies the people, processes, and tools to keep
wayfinding content accurate and technology operational.
As emphasized throughout this section, wayfinding content must be kept up-to-date
to be helpful to visitors. It is not a one-time project, but an institutional responsibility
that must be identified and supported with processes and tools. It is important to
begin any wayfinding project with this understanding and with a plan for keeping the
content accurate.

It is also relevant to note that wayfinding updates cannot only be project-driven or

scoped as part of funded construction projects. Wayfinding changes occur outside
construction projects, for example, name changes of destinations, relocations of
offices and clinics, and require constant supervision and consistent operational
support.

When wayfinding technology is a part of the overall wayfinding strategy, there are
additional maintenance responsibilities to keep the software, hardware, and net-
working components up and running.

Best Practices
A. Leverage currently-defined duties and consolidate similar responsibili-
ties into a wayfinding manager role.

12/2012 Page 2-22

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and A collection of responsibilities has been identified that support wayfinding:
Best Practices
• Interior designers at VAMCs are responsible for maintaining and updating
(continued) signage, including wayfinding signs.
• The Public Affairs Officer at VAMCs is responsible for keeping the VA.gov
website for their facility up to date, including driving directions, maps, and
parking information.
• Voluntary Services manages volunteers who give directions at information
desks and aid Veterans in using VetLink, among other responsibilities.
• For VHA facilities that are deploying VPS VetLink kiosks, there are integrated
project teams (IPTs) responsible for aiding in implementation, determining
kiosk locations, running kiosk reports, and managing any wayfinding content
that may be offered through VetLink.
• For the Google Indoors Initiative, IPTs have been assigned to gather floor
plans and department information to deliver to Google and are responsible
for updating that information as needed.
In evaluating non-VA institutions with robust wayfinding programs, those with
dedicated, centralized staff to manage the content and hardware/software have
proven to be the most successful and the most sustainable over time.

It is not within the scope of this document to recommend a staffing plan for way-
finding management, but it is important to understand that there is a collection
of responsibilities that must be identified and operationalized for the system to
be effective.
B. Train front-line staff how to give directions and how to use wayfinding
tools.
Example

At the UCSF Medical Center, a staff training program was introduced in con-
junction with the launch of the integrated wayfinding system. New employee
orientation includes a section entitled “How to give directions” and front-line
staff, such as information desk attendants, physician office receptionists, and
call center staff receive more in-depth training on the logic of the system and its
tools.

pathway.ucsfmedicalcenter.org

Wayfinding Website – Signs – Maps – Touchscreen Kiosks

12/2012 Page 2-23

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Guiding Principles and

Best Practices
Building Name Changes
(continued) Parnassus Heights

Mount Zion

Wayfinding technology is not just patient-facing; staff members use wayfinding

websites and apps to help patients and visitors and also to navigate unfamiliar parts
of their own campus. Including staff in the launch process ensures their adoption of
the tools.

These six Guiding Principles and their associated Best Practices have been used
as the basis for specific recommended strategies that are detailed in the next
section.

12/2012 Page 2-24

 Strategy Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

An Integrated All of the guidance about wayfinding systems and technology in the previous sec-
Approach: Solution tions pertain to VA facilities as a whole. This section delves deeper into strategies
Strategy Model to deliver enhanced wayfinding information to visitors via relevant technologies — all
tuned to serve the specific needs of Veterans and their caregivers and families.

To begin, the Solution Strategy Model (shown as figure 4) demonstrates the pro-
posed strategies in the context of visitors and their needs along a journey to and
through a VA facility. Encircling the wayfinding information that they seek are the
tools and platforms that provide the relevant information.

VA.gov

Trip Planning
Pre- G

oo
What is the street address?

gle
Are there transit options?
ps

Where do I park? Can I valet?

Ma

Which building do I go in?

Is there a particular entrance I need to use?
What floor am I going to?
Indoors Printed

What’s the room name or number?

m.VA.
Getting to the

gov (mobile
Am I going the right way?
Veterans Did I miss the exit?
Am I in the right building?
& Visitors Is this the campus?
Where should I go? Where do I park? Valet?
ility

Which elevator should I take? Which building do I go in?

Am I in the right place? Which entrance?
Fac
ogle

Where’s the nearest restroom?

Where’s the canteen?

)
Fac
Where’s the pharmacy?
e
o

th

Where’s my next appointment?

ilit
G

Where’s the business office?

g

G
in

Where did I park?

o
at

og
vig
v

e
l
a
N go /G
A.
V PS
m. VPS
Figure 4 Wayfinding
Via cellular and Guest Wi-Fi
Solution Strategy Model

Illustrating the first Guiding Principle — Tell visitors what they need to know,
when they need to know it, and in the medium they prefer — the model includes
multiple media to answer the visitor’s questions. Not all tools and media are neces-
sary at every facility.

For example, a small CBOC or VBA office with one entrance and no elevators may
not have any on-site wayfinding issues; getting to the building may be the only
issue. In that case, having accurate driving directions as well as transit and park-
ing information on the VA.gov website may be the only enhancement to the current
offerings. The following section provides a questionnaire to help staff gauge how
complicated their facility is; a more complex facility requires more on-site wayfinding
guidance.

The Model is a framework to provide structured recommendations at a glance.

Detailed recommendations tied to each “slice” of the pie follow. Those strategies
have been categorized as:

12/2012 Page 2-25

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

An Integrated • Platform Strategies address the systems required to deliver wayfinding infor-
Approach: Solution mation and their integration and expansion points.
Strategy Model
• Design Strategies address planning, usability, and lists of recommended fea-
(continued) tures from the visitor’s point of view.
• Operational Strategies address recommendations on the roles, processes and
tools to maintain the system.
It is important to note that this Model represents technologies, including the web,
mobile devices, and self-service kiosks that are in use today and will continue to be
vital wayfinding tools for the next five years. The Model may be revised over time to
include emerging technologies as they gain traction in the marketplace and among
VA visitor demographics.

The Model divides the visitor’s journey into three sections, pre-trip planning, getting
to the facility, and navigating the facility.

Pre-Trip Planning
Today, the “Locations” section of VA.gov for medical centers and clinics offers street
addresses and, in some cases, driving directions and other details for VHA facili-
ties. The recommendation is to expand the information to answer all of the most
frequently-asked questions for every facility.

The NCA website “Locations” provides a map to all National Cemeteries with
the name of the cemetery by state and the street address, with directions from
the nearest airport. The National Gravesite Locator provides the Veteran’s name,
branch of service, rank, dates of birth and death, name and location of cemetery,
and the location of the burial site shown on a printable map.

As noted in the Integrated Wayfinding Experience Model (Figure 1), most people
who look for directions online start with Google (83 percent in December 2013),
so it is important that Google’s location information for VA facilities, beginning with
the each facility’s street address is accurate. As a byproduct of the Google Indoors
initiative street addresses will be checked for accuracy.

Getting to the Facility

Today, VA.gov is not optimized for mobile devices, meaning that it is hard to navi-
gate and read the website from a smartphone or tablet. The site displays the same
content in the same format, regardless of the size of the screen of the device that
is accessing it. A responsive website serves content and tools in the best format for
each device that accesses it. VA.gov is scheduled to re-launch as a responsively-
designed site in August 2014. At that time, visitors will be able to access and refer to
location information more easily.

Navigating the Facility

Once on site, the visitor should have access to wayfinding information in various
media. The VPS system provides a platform to support on-site wayfinding touch-
screens, relevant wayfinding information embedded in check-in kiosks, and other
devices such as tablets as the platform offerings grow. If the facility has adequate
cellular coverage, or even better, a guest wireless network, the visitor can con-
tinue to use his or her smartphone indoors to access VA.gov and Google Indoors.
Several VA Medical Centers have chosen to establish guest wireless networks
using facility funds, since there is not a national guest wireless strategy. For compli-
cated campuses or facilities, a printed map should be available at entrance lobbies
and major information desks.

12/2012 Page 2-26

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended The following strategies emphasize the “what” not the “how” for achieving the inte-
Strategies grated solution outlined in the Solution Strategy Model (Figure 4). However, some
thoughts on implementation have been raised to help visualize how the strategy
may be employed.

In other words, there are multiple ways to achieve these recommendations, and the
strategies below outline the major factors associated with designing, housing, and
delivering wayfinding information. In particular, the platform and operational strate-
gies should be interpreted as proposals for further exploration to determine their
viability within VA infrastructure, administration, and planning.

Strategies Matrix
PLATFORM DESIGN OPERATIONAL
STRATEGIES STRATEGIES STRATEGIES
Expand the current “Locations For each complex facility, one Adopt or further communicate
and Directions” sections of VHA map should be designed and a standard nomenclature
facility pages, NCA locations, published in all applicable of healthcare services and
and VBA offices on VA.gov wayfinding tools such as printed destinations to be used by
to offer enhanced wayfinding maps, visitor guides, website, all VHA facilities and in all
information. on-site touchscreens, on-site wayfinding information.
wayfinding signage.
Build wayfinding functionality All wayfinding technology Define the role of “wayfinding
into the VPS platform, including tools should meet the same manager” at all VA Medical
an enhanced wayfinding module standards of accessibility (ABA/ Centers and provide tools for
of VetLink and wayfinding ADA Specifications and Section those responsible to keep the
touchscreens for main lobbies of 508) that VA.gov and VetLink wayfinding information up to
complex VA Medical Centers. currently attain. date.
In recognition that the optimal On-site wayfinding touchscreens Train staff and volunteers how to
navigational device is the (as built on the VPS platform) give directions and how to use
smartphone, extend and should conform to a checklist of all wayfinding tools.
improve cellular service and usability requirements.
guest Wi - Fi networks at VA
Medical Centers.
Augment efforts of the Google To ensure the utility and Every wayfinding technology
Indoors initiative to map all VA adoption of wayfinding tool should be covered by
facilities. technology tools, it is helpful a service agreement and
to begin the design of each hardware refresh plans should
offering with participatory design be implemented for on-site tools.
sessions with Veterans and
visitors.
All wayfinding technology tools Discourage the procurement
should provide information in of proprietary wayfinding
the major languages of the technology such as
facility’s visitors. touchscreens and apps by
individual VA facilities.

Platform Strategies
The recommendations begin with platform strategies, as derived from the Guiding
Principle: Use cost-effective high-impact solutions, leveraging and extending
assets and platforms as possible. In this document, a platform is defined as a
software environment or system that delivers information to visitors and provides
management tools for VA staff to support the offering.

None of these strategies are based on the adoption or procurement of a new plat-
form. Current VA platforms can efficiently and effectively support the needs of an
integrated wayfinding system.

Platform Strategy 1: Expand the current “Locations and Directions”

sections of VHA facility pages, NCA locations, and VBA offices on
VA.gov to offer enhanced wayfinding information.

12/2012 Page 2-27

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended VA has implemented a template approach to organizing information on all of

Strategies its facilities. As described in the Related VA Initiatives section, VHA Media
(continued) Management oversees the national and local content for VA.gov and has designed
a series of templates for each VHA, VBA, and NCA facility to publish information.
Representatives at the facility level, such as the Public Affairs Officer at the VAMC,
manage the content on their pages, including the Locations section.

Today, the Locations section offers driving directions with the option to generate
customized directions and a map from any street address to the facility’s street
address via a Google Maps link. Links to see the facility’s location on Yahoo,
MapQuest, and Google are also provided.

An effort could be defined to expand the wayfinding information provided on the

Locations page. All facility website Location pages should include a site plan not-
ing entrances and major destinations. The map could be a Google Indoors map (or
Google’s standard map, if the facility hasn’t been mapped) to the facility. Options
could be provided to generate customized driving or transit, parking, and walking
directions to any destination at that facility. (The facility web pages list Healthcare
Services provided at each facility; those could also have links to generate complete
direction sets, using standard nomenclature.) Since all VBA, VHA and NCA facilities
have Location pages, this solution would be helpful for all VA visitors.

Additional functions to print, email, or text direction sets should be accessible from
every set of directions.

As the Solutions Model indicates, there is significant value in making VA.gov a more
helpful tool for smartphone and tablet users. Twenty-one percent of traffic to VA.gov
comes from smartphones and tablets. When the site is responsively designed in
August 2014, all visitors will essentially have a visitor guide to the complete network
of VA facilities in their pocket.

Platform Strategy 2: Build wayfinding functionality into the VPS

platform, including an enhanced wayfinding module of VetLink and
wayfinding touchscreens for main lobbies of complex VA Medical
Centers.
VPS was designed as a platform for self-service transactions at VHA facilities. It
debuted in May 2011 with VetLink kiosks, and their main function is patient check in.

Since inception, the VPS charter has been “device-agnostic” so that the platform
can run and manage any device, as needs are identified. Aside from the free-stand-
ing and desk-mounted VetLink kiosks, the VPS system currently supports many
different form-factors, including 42-inch touchscreens.

A process already exists by which new functions, such as facility/campus wayfind-

ing, can be defined, along with user interface and content requirements. With more
than 3,315 devices in use in VAMCs and CBOCs, the methodologies for deploy-
ment and operations have been honed and codified.

Platform Strategy 3: In recognition that the optimal navigational

device is the smartphone, extend and improve cellular service and
guest Wi-Fi networks at VA Medical Centers.
As explained in the first Guiding Principle’s Best Practice: Mobile has emerged as
the primary wayfinding platform, it is clear that the smartphone has become the
personal wayfinding device.It already is an aid to visitors in their journey to facilities.
But once inside, when cellular service is low or non-existent, and there is no guest
Wi-Fi network, the smartphone is of no help.

12/2012 Page 2-28

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended There are many reasons to pursue a guest Wi-Fi initiative. Significantly, there are
Strategies therapeutic benefits for patients in long-term confinement at VA medical centers, as
(continued) identified by VHA Office of Research & Development, Bioinformatics in a proposal
for a national Veterans guest internet access (VGIA) initiative.

Guest Wi-Fi may also be a key driver of patient satisfaction and, perhaps, even a
point of comparison as Veterans have more choices whether they seek care within
VA or in the new options offered by the Affordable Care Act.

Some VAMCs offer guest Wi-Fi today, and it is being considered by many others.
As business cases are drafted, it is important to note the benefits of delivering real-
time wayfinding information via Wi-Fi to visitors. However, a major constraint is that
VAMCs must finance this provision at the facility level since no separate funding is
available.

Indoor positioning technology offers the ability to locate the position of a user’s
smartphone indoors and deliver relevant information to that user based on his
or her position. The location of the smartphone can be pinpointed by triangulat-
ing nearby Wi-Fi signals or by more sophisticated sensors either in the phone or
embedded in the environment.

Cisco, the market leader in Wi-Fi networking hardware and software, is embedding
location intelligence in its access points (also known as wireless routers) so that
apps and websites can identify the position of the user indoors and deliver contex-
tual information (such as nearby restrooms and amenities or directions to a destina-
tion), regardless of whether the user’s smartphone is on the Wi-Fi network.

Cisco’s is a more proprietary approach than Google’s: Cisco is embedding location

information in the Cisco access point to be used by apps designed specifically to
access and process that data; Google is sensing any wireless signal and recording
where destinations are according to the user’s position as identified by surrounding
wireless signals.

Platform Strategy 4: Augment efforts of the Google Indoors initia-

tive to map all VA facilities.
By every measure, Google is the market leader in navigation. Google Maps for
Mobile is the world’s most popular app for smartphones, with over 54 percent of
global smartphone owners using it at least once during the month of August 2013.
Ninety-one percent of all U.S. smartphones have access to Google Maps. From
Street View to Google Earth, Google spends millions of dollars updating and grow-
ing its mapping data. Google launched Indoor Maps in 2011 and an estimated
25,000 facilities all over the world have been mapped, with malls, airports, and
museums in the lead. Google Indoors is accessible by any device that can access
Google Maps.

Google’s Indoor initiative is composed of two parts, (1) publishing indoor floor
plans with labeled destinations aligned to Google’s base maps and (2) walking the
space with Google’s proprietary tools to provide indoor location positioning on those
maps (linking the virtual maps to the physical environment via detection of wireless
signals’ strength and location). The destinations on the indoor maps are part of
Google’s database and are searchable, meaning that you can find directions from
your location at the hospital’s entrance lobby on Floor 1 to Dialysis on Floor 3. (Note
that destination names would best be standardized through a VA-wide nomencla-
ture initiative.)

If the facility has any visible Wi-Fi network (publicly accessible or staff-facing,
secure or open), then Google will survey the facility, using specialized software that

12/2012 Page 2-29

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended records the strength and location of access points to “stitch” the static floorplan to
Strategies locations in physical space.
(continued) Google Indoors works best when (1) the facility has given Google the floorplans to
publish and (2) the facility has a Wi-Fi network of any kind (public/private, secure/
open) and (3) the Google team has mapped that facility to record where destina-
tions are based on sensing the Wi-Fi signals. When all three are complete, then
people can see the “You are here” blue dot on the floorplan on Google Maps and
can navigate easily to any destination in the building, checking their progress on the
map.

If Google has published the floorplans (1) above, then people can see the floorplan
on Google Maps and can use the map to navigate, even though the map does not
show the “You are here” blue dot. In other words, they can refer to the indoor map to
navigate, but cannot see where they are on the map or check their progress toward
their destination. In this case, it does not matter whether the facility has a Wi-Fi
network.

Other companies are pursuing the “You are here” functionality indoors, but rely on
additional network infrastructure such as intelligent access points that track location
or installation of Bluetooth/iBeacon sensors.

Interior destinations labeled on Google Indoors maps are also searchable from
Google’s main search engine (www.google.com.) For example, if “Radiology” is a
labeled destination on the VA Pittsburgh H. J. Heinz Campus building floorplan, then
a visitor to Google search will find “Radiology, VA Pittsburgh H. J. Heinz Campus”
as a search result with a map to that destination. When a facility has been mapped,
Google will be able to offer more specific directions to destinations within that
facility.

Knowledge of Google Indoors is relatively low in the marketplace, meaning that

Google Maps users only stumble upon it when they happen to search for a destina-
tion that has indoor maps. As more and more locations have indoor maps, more
people will be exposed to the feature.

Google Indoors is now part of the developer toolkit, or API, that Google makes
available to third-party developers to make their own custom applications based
on the Google Map platform. That means that the functionality demonstrated on
the UCSF and MD Anderson websites (customized driving, transit, parking, walk-
ing directions to an interior destination) can be developed on VA.gov or in VA
Connected Health app, MyHealtheVet.

The recommendation to continue to pursue and expand this initiative is based on:

• Google’s dominance in mapping as the primary navigational tool.

• Functionality provided by Google Indoors, including “You are here.”
• Capability to embed Google Indoor maps in VA.gov location pages.
Design Strategies
Design strategies identify the major usability requirements for wayfinding tools.
While tuned for wayfinding technology tools, many of these design strategies may
be applied to more pervasive tools, such as printed communications.

Design Strategy 1: For each complex facility, one map should be

designed and published in all applicable wayfinding tools, including

12/2012 Page 2-30

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended printed maps, visitor guides, website, on-site touchscreens, and

Strategies on-site wayfinding signage.
(continued) As stated in the Guiding Principles Best Practice: Verbal directions are not
enough — people need a guide. Probably the most effective portable wayfinding
tool is a printed map.

Recommendations for map design are described in the VA Signage Design Guide
section on “You are here” Maps and Directories.

Whether they are produced by in-house designers or by outside consultants,

printed maps orient visitors and help them form a mental model of a complicated
environment.

Maps do need to be updated as facilities change and grow and should be overseen
by the wayfinding manager as described in Operational Strategies below.

Design Strategy 2: All wayfinding technology tools should provide

information in the major languages of the facility’s visitors.
Perhaps the greatest advantage of technology-based wayfinding information over
its traditional counterparts is that technology offers the capability to develop and
deliver content in multiple languages. Signs become unreadable when each mes-
sage is presented in more than one or two languages, but a visitor to a website or
using a touchscreen can simply click a button to translate its content to their pre-
ferred language.

Providing wayfinding content in multiple languages does add to the operational

efforts required to maintain the system. For example, a content management sys-
tem must track each destination and its multiple translations. As described in the
Best Practice above, professional interpreters and translators should be consulted
to ensure accuracy.

Design Strategy 3: All wayfinding technology tools should meet

the same standards of accessibility (ABA/ADA Specifications and
Section 508) that VA.gov and VetLink currently attain and that the
VA Signage Design Guide specifies.
For more information, see section508.va.gov and the ABA/ADA Specifications sec-
tion in the Design Elements chapter of this document.

Design Strategy 4: On-site wayfinding touchscreens (as built on the

VPS or NCA platforms) should conform to a checklist of usability
requirements.
The following checklist is based on the Best Practices from the Guiding Principles
above, site visit observation, and previously-performed user research.

1. For wayfinding, large-format touchscreens (32-inches and greater) work best

to display maps, directory information, and menus at sizes that are easy to
read.
2. Wayfinding touchscreens are best placed where visitors need wayfinding
guidance most, such as entrance lobbies and elevator lobbies.
3. Static signage such as a map and floor directory should flank every wayfind-
ing touchscreen to create a “wayfinding information station.”
4. When possible wayfinding touchscreens should be positioned near informa-
tion desks or other places where staff members or volunteers can help people

12/2012 Page 2-31

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended use them and monitor whether they are functioning properly. Staff should be
Strategies trained to help visually impaired people access wayfinding information.
(continued) 5. Each touchscreen needs an “attract mode” or screensaver to broadcast its
functionality — “Get directions here” or “Find gravesites here” — to passersby.
6. When positioned in portrait mode, touchscreens are more usable for people
of various heights and for those in wheelchairs.
7. The user interface should be simple and uncluttered, with a prominent func-
tion to search for a destination or browse through a list of destinations.
8. Touchscreens should use common gestures; for example, tap a button to acti-
vate it and pinch and stretch to zoom.
9. Buttons to change language or to move the active area of the screen down for
increased usability by those in wheelchairs should be prominently placed.
10. On-screen maps should be oriented to the user’s perspective (also known as
“heads-up” maps) and highlight the user’s current location.
11. Directions should be provided as step-by-step directions and a map, high-
lighted and even animated to show the journey from start to finish.
12. Touchscreens should offer the ability to text or email direction sets to visi-
tors. Research has shown that the ability to print customized directions at a
touchscreen is welcomed by visitors. However, printers (jamming, maintain-
ing or becoming inoperable) have been problematic in many installations.
NCA kiosk printers and VetLink kiosk printers operate well, perhaps because
operational policies have been put in place.
Design Strategy 5: To ensure the utility and adoption of wayfinding
technology tools, it is helpful to begin the design of each offering
with participatory design sessions with Veterans and visitors.
The aim of participatory design is to involve all stakeholders — in this case, Veterans
and their families and caregivers, VA staff, and volunteers — in the beginning phases
of the design process to support their needs and expectations in the final offering.

It is important to elicit the input from various user groups, such as aging Veterans,
those whose first language is not English, and those with limited mobility to ensure
that wayfinding tools meet their needs.

The outcomes of participatory design sessions are often illuminating. If one were
held to further define the checklist of usability requirements for touchscreens, per-
haps additional requirements would be discovered, more finely tuning the tool to the
specific needs of Veterans.

Operational Strategies
Operational strategies identify recommended procedures for supporting the inte-
grated wayfinding system and its technology components.

Operational Strategy 1: Adopt and communicate a standard nomen-

clature of healthcare services and destinations to be used by all
VHA facilities and in all wayfinding information.
This strategy addresses the Guiding Principle: Maintain consistent nomenclature
across all wayfinding tools. A facility must be internally consistent in its use of
language, but a more holistic and efficient approach would be to employ standard
nomenclature across all VA facilities. In that way, a Veteran who moves across the

12/2012 Page 2-32

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended country from Atlanta to Sacramento knows his appointment at his new VAMC will be
Strategies at “Prosthetics/Orthotics,” same as it was at the Atlanta VAMC.
(continued) As an official nomenclature evolves, it should be used as a companion to the VA
Signage Design Guide in developing all wayfinding content.

Operational Strategy 2: Define the role of “wayfinding manager” at

all VAMCs and provide tools for those responsible to keep the way-
finding information up to date.
This strategy is directly from the Best Practice: Leverage currently-defined duties
and consolidate similar responsibilities into a wayfinding manager role.

How these roles are identified and staffed is beyond the scope of this document, but
the requirement that resources be committed to manage the wayfinding system on
a regular basis is vital to sustaining a useful system.

The types of responsibilities that may be listed as part of a wayfinding manager’s

role are:

• Identify wayfinding changes due to construction and renovation projects and

department relocations.
• Keep the interior and exterior wayfinding signage up to date.
• Manage a centralized database to store all wayfinding information and ensure
that it is published accurately to the website and other tools.
• Monitor usage of wayfinding technology tools, such as website and on-site
touchscreens.
• Oversee design and production of printed maps, room identification signs, and
other regulatory and wayfinding signs.
• Serve as “product manager” of wayfinding technology at the facility, advancing
the integrated wayfinding solution roadmap.
Operational Strategy 3: Train staff and volunteers how to give
directions and how to use all wayfinding tools.
This strategy is directly from the Best Practice: Train front-line staff how to give
directions and how to use wayfinding tools.

Volunteers, registration clerks, and other front-line staff must be conversant in des-
tination nomenclature and the logic of the wayfinding system. They must be able to
assist Veterans and visitors as they navigate the facility, offering maps and guides
when available. A wayfinding module may be added to existing orientation and
ongoing training programs.

Operational Strategy 4: Every wayfinding technology tool should

be covered by a service agreement, and hardware refresh plans
should be implemented for on-site tools.
Hardware requires perpetual support. Just as desktop computers are maintained
on a regular basis by IT support staff, embedded touchscreens and the PCs or
media players that run them must be maintained. Service agreements, whether by
in-house arrangement or by outsourced contracts, are mandatory when it comes to
on-site wayfinding technology.

Hardware also requires a replacement strategy. Every hardware type has an

expected lifecycle that can be documented in budgeting and operational plans.

12/2012 Page 2-33

 Solution Integrated Wayfinding & Recommended Technologies

Recommended Operational Strategy 5: Discourage the procurement of proprietary

Strategies wayfinding technology such as touchscreens, kiosks, and apps by
(continued) individual VA facilities.
As the Best Practice states: Stand-alone, proprietary wayfinding kiosks and
apps are not viable solutions for large-scale organizations like to VA.

It should be clear from the platform recommendations above that VA’s current
enterprise-level systems VA.gov and VPS offer the most robust and efficient path to
delivering wayfinding information on the web and on site.

Funds spent procuring single-facility wayfinding devices would be better spent con-
tributing toward the solution strategy outlined previously in this document.

Gauging the Complexity of an Environment

The answers to the following questions indicate the relative complexity of a given
campus, site, or building. Generally, the more of these attributes a facility shares,
the more complicated the visitor’s journey becomes and the more helpful an inte-
grated wayfinding system will be.

1. Does the facility have:

multiple buildings?
multiple self-parking options?
multiple campus entries?
multiple transit stops?

2. Does the main building have:

multiple public entrances?
more than one public elevator bank?
If so, do the elevators serve different floors/areas?
more than two wings?

3. Is there a change in grade in public areas? For example are there entrances
on more than one floor, such as Ground Floor and Floor 1?
4. If more than one entrance, is the majority of parking closest to the main
entrance?
5. Are distinctions between public areas and back-of-house areas clearly
defined?
6. Are there frequent periods of construction and renovation inside or outside
the facility?
7. Have temporary signs and routes become permanent over time?
8. In the main lobby, can visitors get oriented and find destination information?
These indicators may uncover specific wayfinding challenge points as well as pro-
vide an overall picture of how simple or how complicated a given campus, site, or
building may be. Once the level of complexity is evaluated, the value of wayfinding
technology in that particular environment can be assessed.

To evaluate whether a facility may need to refresh its interior or exterior signage
program, please refer to “Need a Sign Program” in this document.

12/2012 Page 2-34

 Room & Floor
Renumbering

• Floor Level Numbering

• Room Renumbering

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Introduction

This section of the Sign and Graphic Design Guide covers two basic fundamental
foundations to an effective sign and wayfinding program: proper floor level identifica-
tion and logical, clear and consistent room numbers.

The foundation of wayfinding starts with floors functioning as the basic delineation
of the physical layout of the building. Once a patient or visitor enters the building,
the first question to be resolved is, “What floor level am I on and what floor level is
my destination?” The next question is “What is the room number or location of my
destination?” Following that question, the next question is, “How do I get there?”

An effective wayfinding system needs to answer these questions and provide other
information that people need to function in a building.

It is important to establish a clear and consistent identity for all floor levels as one of
the basic components of the building’s wayfinding system.

12/2012 Page 3-1

 Floor Level Renumbering

Initially, it is important to establish a clear and consistent identity for all floor levels in
a building. This is the basic foundation of a building’s wayfinding system.

Floor Level The first floor of a building is the level where patients and visitors enter the building,
Identification from grade, to the main lobby. It is people’s natural instinct to expect that when they
walk in the main lobby of a building, that is the building’s first level.

When labeling floor levels, designate the first level as Floor 1. Next, work down
through the lower floors, identifying all parking and basement levels. After labeling
the lower levels, work up the building, identifying all mezzanine, interstitial, and up-
per floors.

The established floor level identity should always be displayed at elevator lobbies,
elevator control buttons, directories and stairs. Buildings that have secondary and
service exterior entries on more than one level should display entry/exiting informa-
tion along with the level identity. This assists people entering a building to under-
stand they are not entering the building’s main level thus avoiding confusion and
disorientation.

Site Considerations Clear and consistent level identification is essential for buildings located on sloped
sites with portions of the levels partially above and below grade.

Adjacent or multiple buildings on a sloped site that have floors that do not align
should have clear level identification along with effective directional information.
Keep in mind the “front door to the medical center main lobby” defines the first floor
level.

On a sloped site condition, where buildings are connected with an enclosed walk-
way or corridor, and the building floor levels do not align, an evaluation must be
made regarding coordination of floor level identification. For example, a patient en-
ters the facility at the medical center main lobby and wants to go to a clinic that is
located in another building, which is physically connected to the hospital.

If the transition in walking from one building to the next is VISUALLY VERY CLEAR,
then the buildings can retain their individual floor level numbers. However, at the
entry points to each building, HIGHLY VISIBLE floor level identification must be dis-
played at the building entry points.

If the transition from one building to the next is NOT CLEAR and a person is not
aware they have entered another building, then the buildings floor level numbers
need to be coordinated and matched. This may mean renumbering the floors in the
secondary building in a nonconforming way.

12/2012 Page 3-2

 Floor Level Renumbering

Assigning Floor Level FIRST FLOOR R

Identification
The level patients and visitors enter the
building. 3
Label this floor as “1”.
2
1
B

UPPER LEVELS R
The building levels above the First Floor.
3
Upper building level identification should
be identified by the number ascending
from the first floor. The second floor is
2
numbered “2”, the third floor is numbered
“3” and so on. 1
BASEMENT

The building levels below the First Floor.

B1
Building level identification should be
identified by the letter “B”. Buildings with
B2
multiple basement levels should label
descending basement levels B1, B2, B3,
etc., in the order of descent.

MEZZANINE LEVELS R
Mezzanine level is the level that is be-
tween the first and second floors. Most 3
buildings do not have a mezzanine.

Label this floor level “M”.

2
M
1
B

12/2012 Page 3-3

 Floor Level Renumbering

INTERSTITIAL LEVELS R
Interstitial level is floor level that is not
accessible to the public. Generally these 3
types of levels have building support I2
equipment. Most buildings do not have
interstitial levels.
2
Label this floor level “I”. I1

1
B

When a building is on a sloping site, the R

first floor is the level which patient and
visitors enter the building, as a main
entrance, and enter into a main lobby
3
reception area.

The lower level is then designated a

2
1
basement, even though it is at grade.

Older buildings which were constructed

B
with a staircase leading up a flight or
partial flight of stairs to the main level,
typically had this level designated as the
first floor and the level below labeled as
the ground floor or basement.

If Ground Floor is used as a designation,

change it to Basement.
R

3
2
1
B

12/2012 Page 3-4

 Floor Level Renumbering

Older buildings which were constructed R

with a staircase leading up a full flight of
stairs to the main level, typically had this
level designated as the first floor and the
3
level below labeled as the ground floor
or basement. 2
If ground level has level access from
grade, the designation of that level
should be 1.
1

Sloped site condition, where buildings R

are connected with an enclosed walkway
or corridor, and the building floor levels
do not align, and the transition from one
3
building to the next is NOT CLEAR and
a person is not aware they have entered 2 2
another building, then the buildings floor
level numbers need to be coordinated
and matched based upon the level that
1
serves as the main entrance.
B1 B1
B2

Sloped site condition, where buildings are connected with an enclosed walkway or
corridor, and the building floor levels do not align, but the transition in walking from
one building to the next is VISUALLY VERY CLEAR, then the buildings can retain
their individual floor level numbers.

3
3 2
2 1
1 B
B

12/2012 Page 3-5

 Floor Level Renumbering

Implementation of PROCESS
Floor Number/Level • Conduct a survey of existing floor level identification and conditions.
Changes
• Develop revised floor level designations.
• Determine what needs to be changed in the sign program: elevator cars, eleva-
tor lobbies, stairwell signs, directories, automatic alarm annunciators, building
automation systems, etc.
• Coordinate with facility manager, engineering, dietary, information manage-
ment, safety, and nursing.
• Advise the on-site, and/or local Fire and Police Departments of this change in
the facility.
• Develop documentation necessary to implement the change. This will involve
changes to both the elevators and the sign program at the same time.
• Arrange for implementation through typical procedures.
• Alert all staff, prior to the conversion, via email and notifications posted through-
out the facility. Include actual conversion dates along with contact information
for either the department or individual(s) responsible for addressing relevant
inquiries.

WHEN
• Preferable during the completion of a renovation or remodeling project or as
part of the completion of a new construction project.
• Schedule the installation and change over during a weekend or holiday period.

CONSIDERATIONS
• Install the entire program at one time to avoid confusion.
• Create a translation sheet which indicates “old” and “new” level names. Widely
distribute this information, along with the date of change, to staff with plenty of
time before the change.
• After converting to the new level designations, in the elevator lobbies, display a
paper copy of the old vs. new floor levels for several weeks as staff and patients
adjust to the change.

12/2012 Page 3-6

 Room Renumbering

The room numbering system functions as one of the basic pieces of information in
the building’s wayfinding system.

The wayfinding system can be compared to the process people use when travel-
ing through a town or city to reach their destination. First they go to the right part
of town, next they find the right street, and finally they look for the right address. In
a building, they use a similar process by first going to the right floor level, next they
find the right corridor, and finally they look for the right room number. That room
number serves as the “address”.

Room Numbering as a Room number systems identify each room in a building using a consistent recogniz-
Wayfinding Tool able pattern. In addition to identifying the room, the room numbering system also
assists in orienting visitors, patients and employees and serves as a sequential
guide to help them navigate through sometimes complex building floor plans.

Room Numbering Room numbering systems in a medical center play a primary role in the function
Effects on Operations and operations of a facility. A room numbering system that is confusing, or unlike
typical addressing systems, will effect the ability of visitors, patients and employees
to quickly find their destinations. For example, a confusing numbering system will
effect planning and maintenance staff, dietary staff and others who are responsible
for pick up and deliveries within a building.

Importance of a Clear The assignment of a “beneficial” room number provides an opportunity for the
Room Numbering patient to create an immediate mental image of the actual space location in the
System building. By knowing a beneficial room number, a person can enter the building and
ascertain what floor, wing, and location on that wing the target space is, without ad-
ditional wayfinding tools such as directories, lines on floors, or directional signs.

Fixing “Broken” Room Most often room numbering systems that are “broken” are a result of new construc-
Numbering as a tion being added to existing facilities with the room numbers not being coordinated
Wayfinding Tool between the buildings. The other possibility is extensive or repeated remodeling has
been done when the existing numbering system was not flexible enough to accom-
modate change.

When embarking on a project to correct a “broken” room numbering system, several

things need to be taken into account. Many departments will be effected in a medi-
cal center and all departments need to participate in the development of the num-
bering system to facilitate a smooth and orderly transition.

Typical departments that are effected by room number changes are Facility
Management, Engineering, Environmental Management, Pharmacy, Medical
Administration, Nutrition and Food Service, Police Services, and Information
Resource Management.

Planning for a change will take time and should involve communication to as many
staff as possible long before the change is implemented.

12/2012 Page 3-7

 Room Renumbering

Method to Implement A new room numbering system can be implemented and the old number system
New Room Numbers retained.
While Retaining Old
Numbers The new room number system is put in place on the wall at the side of the door as
a part of a new sign program. The old room number can be put on a small sign (i.e.
1” X 4”) mounted on the top of the door frame on the hinge side. With this approach,
when a new corrected room numbering scheme is put in place, the old room num-
ber designation is not effected. The old room number on the plaque that is attached
to the door frame retains the old number for as long as necessary. The new room
number is then in place for the public and the wayfinding system.

While this approach may address the concerns of those who do not want to change
numbers, it does introduce two systems into a building. Typically the new system
will get adapted by people in a matter of just a couple of weeks. Then a decision will
need to be made regarding what departments will stay using the old system.

Although engineering may want to remain with the old system, it is not recom-
mended. There are ways for engineering to make room number revisions while
maintaining the integrity of their databases. For example, Computer Aided Facility
Management (CAFM) systems can include programs for old room numbers and
new room numbers that will electronically solve such concerns. The effort to in-
corporate the revisions in CAFM can also be included in the replacement signage
contract.

Criteria for Room The following is a guide for a door/room numbering system and a proposed method
Numbering to implement the system. They are intended for a starting point for developing an ef-
fective system.

General Wayfinding Building layout and shape play a significant role in the development of a room num-
Considerations ber system that functions correctly.

Review a site plan identifying the building entrances and access usage. Evaluate
the building floor plan and identify main features, primary entrance, exits, hallways,
elevators and determine major paths of travel. When determining the paths of travel,
also identify where these paths of travel originate.

Identify major and secondary corridors, waiting rooms, office suites, service and ac-
tivity rooms, open office areas, and mechanical/utility rooms and spaces.

Determine major, secondary and tertiary destinations such as clinics, reception ar-
eas, offices, nursing stations, pharmacy, rest rooms, and the like. Note locations of
vertical circulation elements (elevators, stairs).

Survey and make note of the building’s structural “grid”, beams, columns, windows,
and shear walls. Note corridor alignments and other architectural elements like atri-
ums, courtyards, and patios.

Note patterning in building construction: Do walls tend to follow a pattern of place-

ment? Do walls follow a pattern from floor to floor? Are corridors in the same lo-
cation from floor to floor? Are certain rooms in the same location on each floor?
Also, identify where existing room numbers function well and may not require any
revisions.

12/2012 Page 3-8

 Room Renumbering

Room numbers are a label of identification. They can convey identification of the
floor level, building area as well as the specific number of the room.

Room numbers would typically be formatted with the first digit(s) designating the
floor, the second digit (or letter) designating the building area, and depending on
the size of the building area, the next 2 or 3 digits are identifying the actual room.

Smaller buildings or building configurations that permit the use of 4 digits is a pre-
ferred system. The use of 4 digits for a room number tends to be easier for people
remember

Floor Number Floor Number

4 Digit Building Area/Wing 5 Digit Building Area/Wing

System System
Room Number Room Number

2D77 3B042
2477 32042
It is recommended that individual room numbers not exceed 5 numerals/characters.
Room numbers composed of more than 5 numerals/characters tend to be more dif-
ficult to remember. If a building is over 9 stories, exceeding the 5 character guide is
a natural progression of accommodation. Adding an additional digit designation for
a room within a room is also a natural progression. Inserting a hyphen between the
building area designation and room number is also acceptable.

Building Area Depending on the configuration of the building floor plan, there are several methods
Designation to use in order to designate areas or features to support a clear and coherent room
numbering system.

AREAS
Based on the floor plan, generate a key plan delineating blocks of rooms and ac-
cess corridors. Establish area symbols (A, B, C or 1, 2, 3, etc.) on a key plan. The
area identifier is then used as part of room number and corridor number. Use of
cardinal directions (N, S, E, W) are not beneficial in area designations as users lose
directional perspective once inside a building.

D or 4 E or 5
C or 3

F or 6
A or 1
B or 2

12/2012 Page 3-9

 Room Renumbering

Building Area LOBBY and WAITING AREA

Designation Lobby identification should follow the numbering sequence of rooms. Assign a num-
(continued) ber in sequence to the room adjacent too or nearest to the lobby entry.

CORRIDORS
Corridor identification can also follow the numbering sequence of rooms.

ZONES
Establishing zones is a method of assigning a “room number” to constantly chang-
ing space such as workstation areas located in open floor plans.

Create a reference grid based on an architectural feature such as column lines. Use
letters on one axis and numbers on the other axis to identify each location within
the grid.

Room Numbering When applying a room numbering scheme to a facility, it is helpful to think of the
Scenarios process as being similar to traveling to a new place in town. You move from the gen-
eral to the specific. You have to get to the right part of town, find the right street, and
finally the right address.

Depending on the architectural configuration of a building, certain room numbering

scenarios may prove to work better than others. The key is to provide a logical con-
sistent pattern that people can follow.

Many times, when renumbering a building, there might be several different ways of
patterning of numbers that might work. Chose a scheme that will have the ability
to adapt to future building additions with no disruption to what has been applied.
Often, the simplest system is the most practical.

In the following pages we will discuss two numbering systems. One numbering sce-
nario is based upon a grid applied to the building floor plan. The other scenario is
based upon sequential numbering.

Numbering off a grid allows for room numbers to be added and deleted without ef-
fecting the numbering system. It does mean that numbers appear to jump when go-
ing down a hallway where there are no doors.

Numbering in a sequential fashion has numbers following the sequence of the

doors along a corridor. Following this approach requires introducing numbers with
a “sub-set” designation when new rooms are created within an existing numbered
space.

12/2012 Page 3-10

 Room Renumbering

Odd / Even Grid With the odd/even grid scheme, analyze the floor plan and develop a grid based on
Room Numbering consistent architectural building elements such as columns, window patterns etc.
Scenario
After developing a grid, assign odd room numbers to one side of the corridor grid
and even room numbers to the opposite side of the corridor. This patterning follows
the common addressing pattern used in cities and towns.

FLOOR PLAN EXAMPLE FLOOR PLAN EXAMPLE WITH

GRID NUMBERS APPLIED

100 101

102 103

104 105

106 107

108 109

110 111

112 113

114 115

116 117

118 119

120 121

122 123

124 125

126 127

128 129

12/2012 Page 3-11

 Room Renumbering

Odd / Even Grid After applying the grid, assign room numbers based upon which grid area contains
Room Numbering the room door opening. The grid numbering always stays constant and if there are
Scenario no door openings in a grid area, then that grid number is not used.
(continued) A grid number system assigns a number to an area of the building and allows re-
modeling to occur with rooms being added or deleted without changes to the num-
ber system.

100 3B100 101

102 3B103 103

3B102
3B104
104 105

3B106A
106 107
3B106 3B107
3B108 3B109
108 109

110 111
3B110 3B111
3B112 3B113
112 3B110A
113

3B115
114 115

3B116 3B117A
116 117
3B117

118 119
3B119

120 3B121 121

3B123
122 123

3B124 3B125
*This room could be num- 124 125
bered 3B126 because it
could be easily remodelled
to have access off the hall.
126 * 3B127 127
Or, it could be numbered 3B128B
3B128B because it is
128 129
accessed off room 3B128. 3B128

12/2012 Page 3-12

 Room Renumbering

Odd / Even Grid After applying room numbers, based upon the room door opening on to the corridor,
Room Numbering within the grid area, address the numbering for rooms that are located within rooms.
Scenario
Typically these interior rooms are given a sub-set designation. This designation can
(continued) be in the form of a letter or number. Using a letter tends to be easier for people to
remember and use.

4B123 - Room with a corridor door in the assigned grid area

4B123A or 4B123a or 4B123.1 - Designation for a room accessed through the

room that is accessed from the corridor.

The preceding illustration shows several examples of how to address rooms within
rooms, rooms extending over several grid zones and two rooms opening in the
same grid zone.

Sequential With the sequential scheme, take the floor

Room Numbering plan and apply room numbers down the
Scenario corridor. 4B100

At logical breaks in the corridor, like at

stairs or elevators, some numbers can be 4B102 4B101
skipped. This will allow some flexibility with-
4B103
in the sequential system in case of future
room re-configurations and remodels.
4B106A
The same as the odd/even scenario, inte- 4B106 4B105
rior rooms, off rooms, are given a sub-set 4B107 4B108
designation.

This designation can be in the form of a

letter or number. Using a letter tends to be 4B109 4B110
easier for people to remember and use. 4B111 4B112
4B109A
NOTE: While the adjacent illustration is
showing the use of a number and letter 4B113
designation system (i.e., 4B109), a five
number designation works equally as well
4B114 4B115
(i.e., 42109). 4B116

4B117

4B118

4B119
4B120
4B121

4B123A
4B122
4B123B

4B123

12/2012 Page 3-13

 Room Renumbering

Every building has conditions that may require deviation from the room numbering
scenario being applied, but these deviations should be kept to a minimum. If there
are too many, then there is a problem with the scenario being applied.

Sometimes there are buildings, or floors, where it is virtually impossible to imple-

ment a logical numbering system. There may be to many disconnected corridors,
rooms within rooms within rooms or simply no defining pattern to the rooms in the
building or space.

Adding and Deleting A numbering system for existing rooms/spaces should allow for future additions or
Room Numbers subtractions to the original system.

Large rooms that have been sub-divided and remodeled to serve other functions
can be identified by adding a sequential sub-set letter or number to the original
room/space number.

Original Room/Space Number - 1A013 (Retain for 1 room/space)

Added Rooms/Space Number - 1A013A, 1A013B

Original Room/Space Number - 1A014 (Retain for 1 room/space)

Added Rooms/Space Number - 1A014.1, 1A014.2, 1A014.3

Groups of small rooms/spaces remodeled into larger rooms/spaces by removing

walls/partitions should retain one of the original room/space numbers that follows in
sequence to the numbers patterned off the entrance from the corridor.

A number that has not been used in the Existing Plan may be assigned within reno-
vated area/space or new area/space if it falls within the sequencing.

An available room number may be re-assigned to another room after plan change.

A room number should not change if the function or use of a room changes.

In the case where a room/space is served by more than one door, the room number
should follow a number designation based upon the access to the room from cor-
ridor, anteroom, or lobby in sequence.

Rooms/spaces that could be accessed by a multiple door conditions are usually

office suites, alcoves, secretarial area, closets, air/mechanical shafts, stairs, eleva-
tors, and mechanical/electrical rooms.

When deleting old room numbers keep existing numbers in place unless the de-
leted numbers create confusion.

12/2012 Page 3-14

 Room Renumbering

Adding and Deleting

Room Numbers 2322 2322
(continued) 2325 2325
2324 2324

2328 2329 2328 2329

2330 2333 2330 2333

2334 2335 2334 2335

2337

2340 2341

ORIGINAL ADDED ROOMS

Grid System Grid System

2322 2322
2324 2324
2323 2323

2325 2326 2325 2326

2327 2328 2327 2328

2329 2330 2329 2330

2329A 2330A

2331 2331 2332

ORIGINAL ADDED ROOMS

Sequential System Sequential System

12/2012 Page 3-15

 Room Renumbering

Open Office Plan Large rooms that have been sub-divided with open office systems can identify
Zone Numbers zones within the room by adding a sequential sub-set letter or number to the room/
(continued) space number.

Room Number - 1A013

Open Office Zone/Space Number - 1A013a1, 1A013a2

Room Number - 2334

Open Office Zone/Space Number - 2334b1, 2334b2

2322
2325
2324

2328 2329

2330 2333
a3 a2 a1
b3 b2 b1
2335
2334 c3 c2 c1
d3 d2 d1
e3 e2 e1

f3 f2 f1

Implementation of PROCESS
Room Number • Conduct survey of existing room locations, floor plans and conditions.
Changes
• Develop proposed room number scenarios
• Determine what requires change in the sign program.
• Develop preliminary sign location plans and message schedules for new signs.
• Coordinate with all department managers, facility management, engineering,
dietary, information management, safety, nursing, pharmacy, and fiscal.
• Develop final documentation necessary to implement the change. This will in-
volve implementing the changes to both the room identification signs and the
directional sign program at the same time.
• Arrange for implementation through typical procedures.

12/2012 Page 3-16

 Room Renumbering

Implementation of WHEN
Room Number • Preferable during the completion of a renovation or remodeling project or as
Changes part of the completion of a new construction project.
(continued)
• Schedule the change over during a weekend or holiday period.
• Schedule the change at an accounting milestone (end of the month, end of fis-
cal year, or other well defined milestone).

CONSIDERATIONS
• Install the entire program at one time to avoid confusion.
• Create a translation sheet that has “old” and “new” room numbers. Widely dis-
tribute this information, and the date of change, to staff with plenty of time be-
fore the change.
• Install entire new room renumbering program at one time to avoid confusion.
• A recommendation is to install all the signs with the new numbers and then
cover them up with paper signs showing the old number. On the day and time
of the change, remove all the paper signs. This way the entire building gets
changed out at once.
• Code requirements may require updating some sign types and/or locations.
• Directories and directional signs will need to be updated with the new room
numbers.
• New room signs will probably require existing wall surfaces to be cleaned and
freshened up or even painted prior to installation.
• Prior to converting to new room numbers, plan for impacting system changes,
such as alarm annunciators, building automation systems, telephones, fire
alarm systems, code blue, and other room number dependent information
systems.

Corridor Numbering Revising or developing a corridor number system is a task that is directly influenced
by the architectural configuration of the corridors within a building. Particularly in
relation to the shape and form of the building as well as the location of building en-
trances and circulation hubs like elevators, stairs and atriums. It is difficult to define
a simple method of identification that can be universally applicable.

Corridor numbers are very rarely used in wayfinding except in situations where the
architecture of a building, and it’s circulation, allow corridors to define a distinct pat-
tern of clear wayfinding. In this case, the corridors are given names, rather than
numbers, as the method of identification.

There are, however, a few general guidelines for corridor numbers:

• Corridor numbers and the number system need to be distinctly different from
room numbers and room number system. Yet, they need to have a relationship
to the room numbering system on the corridor.
• Corridor numbers need to include a digit that designates the floor level.
• Corridors do not need to be signed for wayfinding purposes.

12/2012 Page 3-17

 Room Renumbering

Stairwell Numbering Stairwell numbering needs to be coordinated with a facility life safety plan. The
identification needs to be consistent throughout a building and from building to
building.

Each stairwell designation needs to be unique and specific to each stairwell and the
designation not repeated within a building or even on a campus.

Stairwell numbers can have a digit that designates a building and a digit that desig-
nates it as an emergency exit or and inner-level circulation path.

Stairwells that have outside exits should have a sign on the outside, adjacent to or
on the door, identifying that this is a stairwell and its specific number. This allows
emergency personnel to be directed to a specific stairwell without confusion.

Elevator Numbering Elevator numbering is typically done for services purposes only.

However, if elevators are given a number, or a letter, and are referred to in the way-
finding system, then the numbers need to have a correlation to the circulation within
a building. For example, Elevator 4 needs to be down the hall, or around the corner
from Elevator 3; Elevator A needs to be the main elevator.

If two buildings are connect together, the elevator designations should not repeat.
Each elevator should have a distinct number as the people using the building may
have no reference that they have changed buildings.

12/2012 Page 3-18

 Exterior
Signs

• Directional
• Building Identification
• Wall Mounted
• Letters
• Traffic

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank
 Table of Contents

Section 4:
Exterior Signs
• Planning 4-2-1 – 4-2-8

• Helpful Hints 4-3-1 – 4-3-2

• Names 4-4-1 – 4-4-2

• Overview 4-5-1 – 4-5-9

• Illuminated Sign Types 4-6-1 – 4-6-44

• Non-illuminated Sign Types 4-7-1 – 4-7-62

• Specification 4-8-1

• Construction 4-9-1 – 4-9-17

• Installation 4-10-1 – 4-10-11

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank
 Planning Exterior Signs

Planning an Exterior An effective working exterior sign program includes different categories of signs;
Sign Program Building Identification, Vehicular, and Pedestrian signs. Signage for those visitors
approaching a site in a vehicle and first seeing the site from a great distance is different
in appearance and design than those signs on the sidewalks and pathways designed for
pedestrians.The differing signage needs are to be carefully considered in developing an
effective exterior sign program. The objective of all exterior signage is to clearly direct
visitors to their destination.

To begin a site evaluation, obtain a site plan of the campus. The plan needs to be to scale
with a notation of direction such as north.

The plan needs to identify all major and minor roadways, driveways, alleys and access
roads. The plan also needs to show accurate parking lot & parking structure locations.
The plan need to include landscape layout which indicates sidewalks, pathways, cross
walks, ramps and stairways. Obtain photographs of the site to give an indication of
building height, sight lines, landscape, and tree coverage.

Visit the site and drive and walk all major roads and pathways. Identify all major building
entrances. Approaching the site by private vehicle is vastly different than stepping off
the bus. Stairs, ramps, and changes in elevations are all critical pieces of information in
planning an exterior sign program.

While performing an evaluation, take into account the following elements associated
with the site:

Character and configuration of the roadway system.

1. How do visitors currently drive around the site?

2. Where will visitors park?
3. What is the desired path of travel on the roadway system for visitors?
4. What is the desired path of travel on the roadway system for employees and
deliveries?
5. Location of buildings on the facility campus in relation to roads, parking, and
walkways.
6. Location of building entrances.
7. Parking plan for visitors, disabled, and employees.
8. Weather conditions like wind and snow.
9. Tree growth including the canopy height; in the summer and spring, do plants and
trees cover the building(s)?
10. Location of electricity, its availability and voltage.
11. Landscaping and the irrigation system.
12. Adequate light on and around directional signs.
13. Placement of signs in locations where people are expecting them to be.
14. Which signs can have permanent messages and which ones need to be
changeable.
These elements help establish the basis of a clear sign program that communicates and
informs in a direct and simple manner.

An effective sign program for a campus is one that has been planned as an integrated
whole. To include the main identification sign, directional signs, building and building
entrance identification through to the parking lot signs.

12/2012 Page 4-2-1

 Planning Exterior Signs

Wayfinding “Wayfinding” is a term that in recent years has been used to describe the process
of finding a destination in the built environment. Signs play an active role in this
process by providing the primary form of communication in wayfinding.

In developing a wayfinding system for the exterior of a medical center campus or

the interior of a building, some common guidelines must be followed.

The paths of travel from originating points to destinations must be identified.

On the exterior of a campus this involves the roadway system from the main drive
entry to the campus to the main entrance of the building to which patients and visi-
tors are seeking a service. While this is a primary path, a secondary primary path
is from the visitor parking lot to the main entrance or the entrance with services
which the individual is seeking.

Identifying destinations people drive to, where they park, and where they walk to is
the process of identifying the paths of travel. Wayfinding is then communicating to
people along this pathway with appropriate directional signs.

The intersections along the vehicle roadway and pedestrian pathway system need
to be identified in their importance for communication. Major high traffic intersec-
tions will require more communication than smaller secondary intersections. The
environments in which these intersections present themselves also effects the
wayfinding program.

The path of travel and the decision points that are necessary to reach the end
point and where these decision points are located must be considered. At these
decision points, information must be communicated to the driver in a priority of
need.

The priority of need is defined as those departments or services that have the
highest percentage of people seeking them. This high demand information then
needs to be communicated with the highest priority on exterior directional signs.

Secondary information or information that applies to a small percentage of indi-

viduals that visit a campus also needs to be evaluated in regard to its importance.
Typically a driver can only read 2 to 4 messages on a directional sign. Any informa-
tion that is beyond or greater than this is simply not read. Prioritization of commu-
nication of information would then, in most cases, cause the secondary or minor
information to be left off the sign because it is not useful.

In planning a directional sign program for pedestrians, take into account similar
objectives that are done for a roadway directional sign program. Major walkways
need to be identified in their respective intersections where the paths of travel split
to reach various services and entrances.

Types of Signs The main identification sign for a medical center should be a large scale illumi-
nated sign. This can be an internally illuminated monolith sign or a masonry wall
with letters that are illuminated with floodlights. Urban facilities main identification
sign or letters may be directly on the building and should be directly illuminated as
well.

Internally illuminated signs should be considered for those locations where impor-
tant information and directions need to be communicated at night as well as during
the day. This would typically be the main identification sign, the main directional
signs at the entrance to the site and along the primary path of travel, buildings

12/2012 Page 4-2-2

 Planning Exterior Signs

and entrances that have public activity in the early morning, late afternoon, and
evening.

A sign that is illuminated with floodlights can be effective at night. Typically this is a
less expensive way to obtain an illuminated sign, but the ongoing maintenance will
be considerably higher as ground based lights frequently get damaged.

Non-illuminated signs with reflective letters will function quite well for secondary
signs at night. It is a good practice to make all the exterior signs have reflective
letters as that will ensure the best possibility of being read regardless of a signs
importance.

Every site has different climate conditions that effect an exterior sign program.
Considerations for snowfall and frost line will have an impact on post length and
footing depth. For areas where there is a lot of snow, the posts on signs should
be taller so the sign panels do not become covered with snow. How much taller
should be evaluated by site locations’ typical snow fall. Tree growth and the canopy
of trees, both winter and summer, need to be considered. A sign obscured by
plants has little to no value.

Monument signs should be typically reserved for use at the main entrance and
along the principal drive to the main entrance at the medical center. Monument
signs are more expensive than post and panel signs, but provide a more profes-
sional appearance at the main entrance. Use of post and panel signs throughout
the remaining campus for directional signs and building identification is the most
practical approach to signing.

Sizes of Signs Signs that are to be read from a moving car need to be larger than signs that are
read by a driver who is stopped or parked. As the speed of a car increases, the
size of a sign needs to increase. Signs with important messages also need to be
larger. Additionally, the further the distance the sign needs to be read, the larger it
needs to be.

A simple explanation on the importance of size. A sign that is too small is an

annoyance to everyone, because they can’t read it. A sign that is too large will
never be an annoyance because everyone can read it.

Signs directed to pedestrians can be smaller, but they still have to be large enough
to be read. Signs placed close to a walkway can be smaller in scale, but care must
be taken to not make them so small that people don’t notice them.

If in doubt regarding a size decision, choose the next larger size.

Size of Lettering Signs that are to be read from a moving car need to have larger lettering than
signs that are read by a driver that is stopped or parked. As the speed of a car
increases, the size of the lettering on a sign also needs to increase. Signs with
important messages need to have larger lettering.

Additionally, the further the distance the sign needs to be read, the larger the
lettering needs to be. Remember, lettering on a sign that is too small is an annoy-
ance, because it can’t be read.

Signs directed to pedestrians can have smaller text. But, the lettering still has to be
large enough to be read.

If in doubt regarding the size of lettering to use, choose the next larger size.

12/2012 Page 4-2-3

 Planning Exterior Signs

Viewing Distance The following charts provide assistance in determining the size of lettering to be used in
Guide relation to the distance that a sign is going to be read.

These charts are general and there may be situations that would require lettering larger
than what is indicated in the chart for a given distance of viewing.

Symbols
Text Symbols
Figure 1
Viewing Distance Letter Height Application Viewing Distance Letter Height
Viewing Distance Chart
Up To: Up To:

7.5 M 25' 25 mm 1" 7.5 M 25' 75 mm 3"

12 M 40' 40 mm 11/2 " 10.5 M 35' 100 mm 4"
15 M 50' 50 mm 2" 15 M 50' 125 mm 5"
24 M 80' 75 mm 3" 18 M 60' 150 mm 6"
33 M 110' 100 mm 4" 30 M 100' 200 mm 8"
48 M 160' 150 mm 6" 34.5 M 115' 225 mm 9"
75 M 250' 225 mm 9" 39 M 130' 250 mm 10"
97.5 M 325' 300 mm 12" 45 M 150' 300 mm 12"
150 M 500' 450 mm 18"

195 M 650' 600 mm 24"

Arrows The proper use of arrows on directional signs are important to ensure the reader quickly
understands the correct directional information. Grouping all the information together
that is in one direction and using one arrow is preferred. Using an arrow for each mes-
sage makes the sign difficult to read.

Figure 2 Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance

Main Entrance Main Entrance
Sign Face Layout Illustration Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305 Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305

Freight Entrance Freight Entrance

Buildings 314, 317 & 319 Buildings 314, 317 & 319

Preferred Not Recommended

Arrows should be placed in such a manner that they precede the message. This allows
the reader to understand direction first and information second. It also allows the arrows
to be visually separated from text.

Arrows should always be larger in size than the text they are affiliated with. For example,
a 4-1/2” arrow is what would be used with a 3” capital letter size text.

12/2012 Page 4-2-4

 Planning Exterior Signs

Figure 3
Arrow Direction Illustration

Straight Ahead Straight Ahead

To the Left To the Right

To the Left To the Right

Ahead Ahead
on Left on Right

Sign Placement Exterior signs function to communicate to both drivers and pedestrians and their place-
ment needs to be planned relative to the intended viewer. Sign visibility to the user is a
principal objective and that is the basis of correct sign placement.

Signs that are to be read from a car moving down a road need to be large and clearly vis-
ible. Poorly placed signs, that are intended to communicate to drivers, can actually create
traffic hazards. Also, remember that if a sign has too much information, the placement
will have to allow for a driver to stop or slow to a very low speed.

A sign that is directing pedestrians can be placed close to a walkway. Major pathway
intersections are important locations to assist people who are new to a site and are try-
ing to find their way around.

12/2012 Page 4-2-5

 Planning Exterior Signs

Correct placement of signs will usually mean fewer signs are required. Too many signs
can create a cluttered appearance and increase the difficulty for a viewer to find the par-
ticular information they are seeking. Colors and material finish of buildings need to be
taken into consideration as this impacts the visibility of signs.

Care also needs to be taken to place signs in a manner that allow clear viewing.
Placement of signs so trees and shrubs do not obscure them is critical. It is also critical
that signs are not placed in locations that obscure a driver’s visibility of vehicular traffic
and pedestrians.

Coordination needs to take place with things like irrigation systems, electrical service,
and other underground utilities. Proper placement is an important part of a well-
planned program.

Placement Guidelines The following are general guidelines for placing signs to viewed from an approaching
vehicle as well as for mounting signs for pedestrian viewing. Guidelines for specific sign
types are shown in their respective sections.

Straight Ahead: Sign placement must be within the approaching driver’s immedi-
ate cone-of-vision. Drivers cannot be expected to turn their heads to read a sign.
Signs mounted more than 12 M (40 feet) off the roadway because of special cir-
cumstances may require use of a larger panel to increase readability because the
sign is outside the normal cone-of-vision.

Perpendicular: The sign face should be perpendicular to the approaching viewer.

Never place a sign parallel to passing traffic.

Right Side: Place signs on the right side of the roadway whenever possible.
Drivers are not conditioned to look to the left side of the road for driving information.
An exception to this rule is the use of a double-face Standard Identification sign
mounted perpendicular to a facility entrance roadway sign should be sized and
placed with clear target value and readability from both directions.

Distance Legibility: All signs must be clearly legible from the distance at which
they are to be read. The viewing distance guide delineates the appropriate text size.

Advance Warning: Signs on roadways that communicate a desired reaction, must

be placed in advance of the intersection to afford a safe distance for reaction to and
execution of the maneuver.

Viewing Angle: Mount signs at eye level. The height of the average viewer’s eye-
level is 1650 mm (5’-6”) standing, and 1350 mm (4’-6”) driving a car. Signs placed
for viewing from long distances will be mounted higher than those in the immediate
foreground. Mounting height is measured from the ground level to the bottom edge
of the sign panel.

For signs mounted along roadways, the grade of the road is considered ground level.
When ground mounted signs on two posts are placed on sloping or inclined grades,
adjustments must be made to the post lengths and mounting heights. Extreme differ-
ences between post lengths should be minimized whenever possible.

Spacing: Signs must be located with respect to other signs. Mounting sites should
be carefully selected so that groups of signs are placed without creating a cluttered
appearance. Also, drivers must be given time to read and react to one sign before
another is presented.

12/2012 Page 4-2-6

 Planning Exterior Signs

Figure 4 Site Preparation: Placement must be carefully considered to ensure that the sign
Placement / Roadway Illustration fits the location without major regrading. It may be necessary to clear some shrubs
or bushes or relocate an obstruction.

Field Test: An effective way to determine a sign placement location is to place

the actual sign in the proposed location for verification. This is relatively simple for
pedestrian signs; they are viewed from relatively short distances. For signs viewed
from a moving vehicle, testing should include driving the approach from which it is
viewed to verify the appropriateness of the proposed location. A cardboard or brown
paper banner (which is the same size as the proposed sign) can be used instead of
the sign to check placement against the criteria listed above.

Primary cone of vision

Secondary cone of vision

This preferred placement

provides advance warning.

If directional message
faces driver, do not place
Do not place sign sign on the opposite side
parallel to roadway. of the road.

This placement is okay. This placement is preferred.

12/2012 Page 4-2-7

 Planning Exterior Signs

Figure 5
Building / Roadway Illustration

Parking Lot Main Entrance

VA Medical
Center

Main Entrance

Parking

Parking

Parking

Main Entrance

Existing Sign Before implementing a new sign program, perform a through evaluation of the demoli-
Program tion requirements of the current sign program and the effects and impact on the facili-
ties landscaping and irrigation system.

Old sign footings do not typically have to be totally removed. They should however be
demolished to at least 1 foot below grade.

Check to see what is required to patch, seal and repair building penetrations and sur-
faces exposed as a result of removal of signs or letters. Repairs should be planned to
match adjoining surface.

Make sure the sign demolition scope of work requires the contractor to close off any live
electrical connections. Remove existing conductors and conduit to the nearest junction
box and make it safe.

Be sure to clearly identify signs that are supposed to remain. It is especially important to
identify markers and signs that relate to special objects or displays that may be on the
medical center campus or on a building.

DO NOT remove any traffic signs without having the replacement signs available and
installed at the same time the old signs are removed.

12/2012 Page 4-2-8

 Helpful Hints Exterior Signs

The following are some general “Do’s and Don’ts” guidelines that should be referred to
when developing a exterior sign program. This is not intended to be a training section of
the guide, but to provide key information or instructions that will hopefully reduce com-
mon errors that are made when planning and programming an exterior sign program.

General Guidelines • Never use text smaller than 3” capital letter height when a sign is intended to be
read from a moving car.
• Text intended to be read by pedestrians should be a minimum of 1-1/2” capital letter
height.
• Signs do require maintenance. Cleaning and waxing will extend the life of a sign
program.
• Use text (words) which are familiar, easy to understand, and comfortable to the
viewer.
• Always use the same words throughout the sign program.
• All sign messages need to be a minimum of 24” above grade.
• When selecting a background color for the signs, seek a complementary color to the
buildings on campus.
• If overhead signs are used, make sure they have adequate clearance for trucks.
Adequate clearance can be interpreted to be 15’-0”.

Type of Sign to Use • Always consider the landscaping surrounding a sign when determining a sign’s size.
It is important that shrubs and other plants do not hide or obscure the sign.
• Stacking bar signs should always have a blank bar between two different sets of
directional information.
• Lettering and sign panel size should be appropriate for the distance and speed at
which a sign is viewed.

Size of Sign to Use • Signs intended to be seen from a moving vehicle need to be larger and require
larger text than a sign intended for pedestrians.
• Consideration should be given to the use of a facility (i.e., whether a department or
building offers night time services) when determining if a sign should be illuminated
or not.

Message Content • Keep sign messages brief.

• Unnecessary information on signs will confuse the viewer.
• Typically, all signs, with the exception of directional signs, should convey no more
than one concept or thought.
• Use text (words) that can be quickly read by the viewer. Use the same words
throughout the sign program.
• On directional and informational signs only provide information necessary to make
a decision at that particular location.
• When possible, messages should present positive information.

12/2012 Page 4-3-1

 Helpful Hints Exterior Signs

• On directional signs, do not anticipate decisions that can be made later.

Unnecessary or premature information will confuse the reader.
• Messages placed on signs should be concise, preferably with no more than
seven to ten words.
• For signs to be read from a moving vehicle, take into account the speed of
the vehicle. At a slow speed the driver may be able to read 7 or 8 words. At a
faster speed they will only be able to read 4 or 5.

Message Layout • Use upper and lower case text whenever possible. Upper and lower case text
is easier to read and understood faster than text in all capital letters.
• Line-spacing between two different messages should be greater than line-
spacing between lines of the same multiple-line message group.
• Text should not be run right up to the edge of the sign.
• If a line text needs to be reduced in order to fit on a sign, use only commonly
recognized abbreviations, reduce the number of words or reduce the size of
the type for the entire message. DO NOT condense the type face.
• The most important message should appear as the first line text and the most
important directional information should be at the top of the sign.

Placement of Signs • Signs should always be perpendicular to the intended viewer.

• Position signs with a clear line of sight from the viewing point to the sign face.
• Typically a driver gathers visual information by viewing to the right first.
• Keep directional signs on the same side of the street that the driver is driving.
• Always evaluate a sign’s location at night as well as in the daylight. Lighting
conditions and visibility may change at night making a particular location
unsuitable.
• All signs should be placed in a manner that will be clearly visible to a driver at
all times of the year. For example, make sure that snow or removal piles do not
bury signs.
• Signs that receive spray from irrigation sprinklers will show oxidation from the
minerals in the water resulting in a poor appearance. The life of the sign will
also be considerably shortened.
• Always consider the landscaping surrounding a sign when determining a sign’s
location. It is important that trees, shrubs and other plants do not obscure the
sign.
• Do not place signs in locations where people may walk into them. Don’t place
signs any closer than 12” to a walkway.
• Do not place signs too close to curbs. Car overhangs and door swings should
be taken into account.

12/2012 Page 4-3-2

 Names Exterior Signs

Description & Use Message Layout A

The following layouts depict the
various ways that facility names
are to be shown on the main
identification sign. In all cases,
note that there is a hierarchy in the
presentation. The “VA Logo” and
“Department of Veteran Affairs” is Baltimore VA Medical Center
always on the top of the sign and VA Maryland Health Care System
in larger letters than the rest of the
name. VISN identification is always VA Capitol Health Care Network
at the bottom of the sign and has
the smallest letters.

Message Layout A depicts

Consolidated Medical Center
locations. Message Layout B
Message Layout B depicts
congressionally mandated named
facilities.

Message Layout C depicts the typical

facility naming practice. William S. Middleton Memorial
Veterans Hospital
Message Layout D depicts the
combined VHA and VBA locations. Madison
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Message Layout C

Tomah VA Medical Center

VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Message Layout D

VA Medical Center
Regional Office
White River Junction
VA New England Health Care Network

12/2012 Page 4-4-1

 Names Exterior Signs

Message Layout E depicts the Message Layout E

independent VBA Regional Office
locations.

Message Layout F depicts the large

Outpatient Clinic locations.

Message Layout G depicts the VA Regional Office

Community Based Outpatient Clinic Phoenix
locations.

Message Layout F

VA Outpatient Clinic
Appleton

VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Message Layout G

Berverly Clinic
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

New Logo/Signature
The VA has developed a new logo/
signature for use in signage. It
replaces the old logo and name
presentation.

The old logo may remain in use on U.S. Department

existing signs, but all new signs shall
incorporate the new logo/signature. of Veterans Affairs
Adjacent are its application in a Horizontal Sign Format
horizontal format and a vertical
format.

The master art is available as an

electronic file, for downloading, in
the Technical Information Library.
www.cfm.va.gov/til/
U.S. Department
of Veterans Affairs
The master art and typography shall
not be altered. The font, the size
relationship between the elements,
and the letter spacing for the VA and Vertical Sign Format
name, shall remain as presented in
the master art .

12/2012 Page 4-4-2

 Overview Exterior Signs

This section of the VA Signage Guide covers the types of exterior signs that would be
necessary to sign a medical center campus or single building.

Included are illuminated and non-illuminated signs for identification and direction as
well as signs for traffic control and parking.

The following Overview illustrates the various types of signs in this section. The indi-
vidual pages on each Sign Type provide more specific information and detailed layouts.

Illuminated Exterior Each sign in the program guide has been given a specific sign type number designation.
Sign Designations This designation provides a common description that can be referenced when program-
ming a site and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign type designations
are derived.

EI - 03 .01 A
E Designates an exterior sign.
I Identifies that the sign is internally illuminated.
03 Two digit numbers identify a particular sign type family.
.01 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific sign
within the sign family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version, or

layout for graphics.

Non-Illuminated Each sign in the program has been given a specific sign type number designation. This
Exterior Sign designation provides a common description that can be referenced when programming
Designations a site and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign type designations are
derived.

EN - 12 .01 A
E Designates an exterior sign.
N Identifies that the sign is non-illuminated.
12 Two digit numbers identify a particular sign type family.
.01 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific sign
within the sign family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version, or

layout for graphics.

12/2012 Page 4-5-1

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EI-01

Illuminated Monument Sign for
Medical Center Identification

EI-01.01 Baltimore
Large horizontal monument sign Medical Center
VA Maryland
EI-01.02 Health Care System

Standard horizontal monument sign VA Capitol

Health Care System

EI-01.03 Baltimore VA Medical Center

Small horizontal monument sign VA Maryland Health Care System

VA Capitol Health Care Network

EI-01.04
Standard vertical monument sign

EI-01.05
Small vertical monument sign
EI-01.01 EI-01.04

Sign Type EI-02 Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance

Main Entrance Main Entrance
Illuminated Directional Monument Building 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, Building 137, 332,
Sign with Stacking Text Modules 305, 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, 323, 325, 303, 305,
T101 & T102 205, 647, 348, 349,

EI-02.01 350, T101 & T102

Freight Entrance
Large directional monument sign Building 314, 317 & 319 Freight Entrance
with stacking strips - 10 strips Building 314,
317 & 319

EI-02.02
Small directional monument sign
with stacking strips - 10 strips
EI-02.01
EI-02.02

Sign Type EI-03 Main Entrance

Visitor Information
Illuminated Post and Panel Sign for Building 101

Identification and Information Tomah VA Medical Center Visitor Parking

Buildings 222, 333, 323
233 & T444

EI-03.01 VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Post and panel sign for medical

center identification

EI-03.02
Standard auto oriented post and
EI-03.01 EI-03.02
panel sign

Sign Type EI-04 Outpatient Entrance

Main Entrance
Illuminated Post and Stacking Bar Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Sign for Directional Information 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102 Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
Freight Entrance 350, T101 & T102
EI-04.01 Buildings 314, 317 & 319

Large/long auto oriented stacking Freight Entrance

bar directional sign - 6 to 8 bars

EI-04.02
Standard auto oriented stacking bar EI-04.01 EI-04.02
directional sign - 5 to 8 bars

12/2012 Page 4-5-2

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EI-06

Illuminated Wall Mounted Signs

EI-06.01
Overhead wall mounted sign

EI-06.02 Outpatient
Center
Large size wall mounted sign

EI-06.01 EI-06.02

Sign Type EI-08 Ambulance

Ambulance Entrance Signs Entrance
EI-08.01
Overhead wall mounted sign
Ambulance
Entrance
EI-08.02
Wall mounted sign Ambulance
Entrance

EI-08.03
Post and panel sign

EI-08.01 EI-08.02 EI-08.03

Sign Type EI-09 Outpatient Entrance

Dimensional Letters and Logo

EI-09.06 Medical Center

Logo and dimensional letter

EI-09.07
Logo and dimensional letter Medical
EI-09.08
Logo and dimensional letter
EI-09.06
EI-09.09
Logo and dimensional letter

12/2012 Page 4-5-3

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EI-14

4 Sided Monument Sign for
Medical Center Identification

Baltimore
Medical Center
VA Maryland
Health Care System

VA Capitol
Health Care System

EI-14

Sign Type EI-15

4 Sided Monument Sign with
Directional Information for Medical
Center Identification
Baltimore
EI-15.01 Medical Center
William S. Middleton
Large 4-sided monument sign with VA Maryland Memorial
Health Care System Veterans Hospital
stacking directional panels
Madison
VA Capitol
Health Care System
EI-15.02 VA Great Lakes
Standard 4-sided monument sign Health Care System

with stacking directional panels

EI-15.03
Small 4-sided monument sign with Main Entrance
stacking directional panels Clinics
Outpatient Entrance Main Entrance
Freight Receiving Entrance Clinics
Outpatient Entrance

2500 Visitor Parking

Taylor Entrance
EI-15.01 Overlook Terrace EI-15.02

Sign Type EI-16

Monument Sign for Medical Center
Identification with Electronic
Message Center Baltimore
Medical Center

EI-16.01 VA Maryland
Health Care System
Large monument sign with
Electronic Message Center
VA Capitol
Health Care System

EI-16.02
Standard monument sign with Blood Baltimore VA Medical Center

Electronic Message Center Pressure

VA Maryland Health Care System

Screening VA Capitol Health Care Network

7/11
FLU SHOTS 10/17 - 20
2500 CLINIC A
Overlook Terrace

EI-16.01 EI-16.02

12/2012 Page 4-5-4

Blood FLU SHOTS 10/17 - 20

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EN-02

Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance
Directional Monument Sign with Main Entrance Main Entrance
Stacking Text Modules Building 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, Building 137, 332,
305, 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, 323, 325, 303, 305,
EN-02.01 T101 & T102 205, 647, 348, 349,
Large directional monument sign 350, T101 & T102
with stacking strips - 10 strips Freight Entrance
Building 314, 317 & 319 Freight Entrance
EN-02.02 Building 314,
317 & 319
Small directional monument sign
with stacking strips - 10 strips

Building
Admissions
Building
230
EN-02.01
230 EN-02.02
Outpatient
Rehabilitation
Dental Clinic
Eye Clinic

Sign Type EN-03 Main Entrance

Visitor Information
Post and Panel Sign for Main Entrance
Building 101

Identification and Information Building 101 Visitor Parking

Visitor Parking Buildings 222, 333, 323
233 & T444
EN-03.02 Buildings 222,
233 & T444
Standard auto oriented post and
panel sign

EN-03.03
Small auto oriented post and panel
sign
EN-03.02 EN-03.03
EN-03.04
Pedestrian oriented post and panel
sign

EN-03.05
Large auto oriented building
number / identification post and Building
Admissions
panel sign Building
230 230 Outpatient
Rehabilitation
Dental Clinic
Eye Clinic
EN-03.06
Pedestrian oriented building
number / identification post and
panel sign

EN-03.04 EN-03.05 EN-03.06

Main Entrance
Visitor Information
Building 101
Main Entrance
Building 101 Visitor Parking
Visitor Parking Buildings 222, 333, 323
Buildings 222, 233 & T444
12/2012 233 & T444 Page 4-5-5
 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EN-04 Outpatient Entrance

Main Entrance Outpatient Entrance
Post and Stacking Bar Sign for Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305, Main Entrance
Directional Information 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102 Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
EN-04.01 Freight Entrance 350, T101 & T102
Buildings 314, 317 & 319
Large/long auto oriented stacking
Freight Entrance
bar directional sign - 6 to 8 bars

EN-04.02
Standard auto oriented stacking bar
directional sign - 5 to 8 bars
EN-04.01 EN-04.02
EN-04.03
Small auto oriented stacking bar
Outpatient Entrance
directional sign - 4 to 6 bars Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Main Entrance
Buildings 137, 332,
EN-04.04 323, 325, 303, 305, Buildings 137 & 332

Pedestrian oriented stacking 205, 647, 348 & 349

directional bar sign - 2 to 4 bars

EN-04.03 EN-04.04

Sign Type EN-05

Freight Freight Freight
Single Post Identification, Loading
Loading Loading
Zone
Zone
Informational and Directional Sign Zone

EN-05.01
Large single post identification,
informational and directional sign

EN-05.02
Standard single post identification,
informational and directional sign

EN-05.03 EN-05.01 EN-05.02 EN-05.03

Small single post identification,
informational and directional sign

12/2012 Page 4-5-6

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EN-06

Spinal Rehabilitation
Wall Mounted Signs Clinic Entrance

EN-06.01
Overhead wall mounted sign
Building Building

EN-06.02
230
Admissions
230
Large size wall mounted sign Outpatient
Rehabilitation Admissions
Outpatient
Rehabilitation

EN-06.03
Dental Clinic

Large size wall mounted sign with

stacking strips

EN-06.04
Medium size wall mounted sign EN-06.01 EN-06.02 EN-06.03

EN-06.05
Medium size wall mounted sign
Building
with stacking strips Building Building
230 230 230
EN-06.06 Admissions
Outpatient

Regular size wall mounted sign Rehabilitation

Dental Clinic

EN-06.07
Small size wall mounted sign

EN-06.08
Minor informational wall mounted EN-06.04 EN-06.05 EN-06.06
sign

EN-06.09
Minor informational wall mounted Freight &
Delivery
Freight &
Delivery Visitor
sign
Entrance
Entrance Parking

EN-06.07 EN-06.08 EN-06.09

12/2012 Page 4-5-7

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EN-08

Ambulance Entrance Signs
Ambulance
Entrance
EN-08.01
Overhead wall mounted sign

EN-08.02 Ambulance
Entrance
Wall mounted sign
Ambulance
EN-08.03 Entrance
Post and panel sign

EN-08.01 EN-08.02 EN-08.03

Sign Type EN-09

Dimensional Letters and Logo

EN-09.01
Dimensional letter Outpatient Entrance

EN-09.02
Dimensional letter Medical Center

EN-09.03
Dimensional letter Medical Center
EN-09.04
Logo and dimensional letter

EN-09.05 EN-09
Logo and dimensional letter

Sign Type EN-10

Traffic Regulatory Signs

EN-10.01
Stop (R1-1)

EN-10.02
Do Not Enter (R5-1)

EN-10.03
Yield (R1-2)

EN-10.04
Speed Limit (R2-8)

EN-10.05
Keep Right (R4-7A)

EN-10.06 EN-10.01
One Way (R6-2L, R6-2R)

EN-10.07
No Right/Left Turn (R3-1R, R3-2L)

EN-10.08
No U Turn (R3-4)

EN-10.09
Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2A)

12/2012 Page 4-5-8

 Overview Exterior Signs

Sign Type EN-11

Street Name Street Name
Street Signs

EN-11.01
Tall double blade

Main Street
EN-11.02
Tall single blade

EN-11.03
Pylon

EN-11.01 EN-11.02 EN-11.03

Sign Type EN-14

Building Entrance Door
Identification

12/2012 Page 4-5-9

This page is intentionally left blank
 Exterior Signs

Illuminated Exterior
Signs

12/2012 Page 4-5-11

This page is intentionally left blank
 EI-01.01 Exterior Signs
Site Monument
Size
Sign Face:
1524 mm H x 3658 mm W x
305mm D
(5' 0" H x 12' 0" W x 1’ 0” D) Baltimore VA Medical Center
VA Maryland Health Care System
Description & Use
Internally illuminated large VA Capitol Health Care Network

horizontal free standing monument

sign for identifying a medical
center or the medical center’s main
entrance drive.

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center. Message Layout A Message Layout B

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Baltimore VA Medical Center William S. Middleton Memorial
VA Maryland Health Care System Veterans Hospital
Specific message configuration will Madison
vary depending on the particular VA Capitol Health Care Network VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

name of a facility. Variations to the

presentation of a facility’s name
will need special approval from Message Layout C Message Layout D
Washington DC.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed Tomah VA Medical Center VA Medical Center
with white translucent acrylic. Regional Office
White River Junction
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network VA New England Health Care Network
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart Message Layout E Message Layout F
Accent: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
VA Regional Office VA Outpatient Clinic
clear, unobstructed view of the
Phoenix Appleton
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low and position sprinklers so VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

they project away from the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-1

 EI-01.01 Exterior Signs
Site Monument
3657.6 mm (12'-0")

203.2 mm 2'-9" 303.4 mm

(8") (1'-0")

7"

533.4mm (1'-9")

214.7 mm (8 1/2")
1524.0 mm
(5'-0") 120.8 mm (4 3/4")
120.8 mm (4 3/4")
88.9 mm (3 1/2")
214.7 mm (8 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
25.4 mm (1")
76.2 mm (3")
609.6 mm 25.4 mm (1")
(2'-0")

Message Layout A & F

203.2 mm 2'-9"
(8")

7"

533.4mm (1'-9")

1524.0 mm 120.9 mm (4 3/4")

(5'-0") 74.8 mm (3")
120.9 mm (4 3/4")
95.3 mm (3 3/4")
88.9 mm (3 1/2")
127.0 mm (5")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

Message Layout B & D

203.2 mm 2'-9"
(8")

7"

533.4mm (1'-9")

1524.0 mm 214.7 mm (8 1/2")

(5'-0") 120.8 mm (4 3/4")

63.5 mm (2 1/2")
127.0 mm (5")

Message Layout C

203.2 mm 2'-9"
(8")

7"
533.4mm (1'-9")

214.7 mm (8 1/2")
1524.0 mm
(5'-0") 120.9 mm (4 3/4")
120.9 mm (4 3/4")
74.8 mm (3")

Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-6-2

 EI-01.02 Exterior Signs
Site Monument
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 3048 mm W x
305mm D
(4' 0" H x 10' 0" W x 1’ 0” D)

Description & Use Baltimore VA Medical Center

Internally illuminated horizontal
VA Maryland Health Care System
free standing monument sign for
identifying a medical center or the VA Capitol Health Care Network

medical center’s main entrance

drive.

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions) Message Layout A Message Layout B

Specific message configuration will

vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the Baltimore VA Medical Center William S. Middleton Memorial
presentation of a facility’s name VA Maryland Health Care System Veterans Hospital
Madison
will need special approval from VA Capitol Health Care Network VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Washington DC.

Graphic Process Message Layout C Message Layout D

Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.
Tomah VA Medical Center VA Medical Center
Colors Regional Office
Text: White White River Junction

Background: Refer to color chart. VA Great Lakes Health Care Network VA New England Health Care Network

Accent: Refer to color chart.

Message Layout E Message Layout F
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the VA Regional Office VA Outpatient Clinic
sign low and position sprinklers so Phoenix Appleton

they project away from the sign. VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

12/2012 Page 4-6-3

 EI-01.02 Exterior Signs
Site Monument

3048 mm (10'-0")

152.4 mm 2'-3" 303.4 mm

(6") (1'-0")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")
95.2 mm (3 3/4")
76.2 mm (3 ")
165.1 mm (6 1/2")
57.1 mm (2 1/4")
25.4 mm (1")
76.2 mm (3")
609.6 mm 25.4 mm (1")
(2'-0")

Message Layout A & F

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

127 mm (5")
1219.2.0 mm
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
(4'-0") 57.1 mm (2 1/4")
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")

57.1 mm (2 1/4")

Message Layout B & D

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")

63.5 mm (2 1/2")
127.0 mm (5")

Message Layout C

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")
95.2 mm (3 3/4")
76.2 mm (3 ")

Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-6-4

 EI-01.03 Exterior Signs
Site Monument
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 2438 mm W x 305
mm D
(4' 0" H x 8' 0" W x 1’ 0” D)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated small Baltimore VA Medical Center
VA Maryland Health Care System
horizontal free standing monument
sign for identifying a medical center VA Capitol Health Care Network
where there is a space limitation.
This sign can also be used to
identify secondary drive entrances
to the medical center.

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.

Message Configuration Message Layout A Message Layout B

(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Specific message configuration will

Baltimore VA Medical Center William S. Middleton Memorial
vary depending on the particular VA Maryland Health Care System Veterans Hospital
name of a facility. Variations to the Madison
presentation of a facility’s name VA Capitol Health Care Network VA Great lakes Health Care Network

will need special approval from

Washington DC.
Message Layout C Message Layout D
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors Tomah VA Medical Center VA Medical Center

Text: White Regional Office
White River Junction
Background: Refer to color chart
Accent: Refer to color chart VA Great Lakes Health Care Network VA New England Health Care Network

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a Message Layout E Message Layout F
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low and position sprinklers so
they project away from the sign.
VA Regional Office VA Outpatient Clinic
Phoenix Appleton
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer, VA Great Lakes Health Care Network
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-5

 EI-01.03 Exterior Signs
Site Monument

2438.4 mm (8'-0")

152.4 mm 2'-3" 303.4 mm

(6") (1'-0")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")
95.2 mm (3 3/4")
76.2 mm (3 ")
165.1 mm (6 1/2")
57.1 mm (2 1/4")
25.4 mm (1")
76.2 mm (3")
609.6 mm 25.4 mm (1")
(2'-0")

Message Layout A & F

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

127 mm (5")
1219.2.0 mm
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
(4'-0") 57.1 mm (2 1/4")
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")

57.1 mm (2 1/4")

Message Layout B & D

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")

63.5 mm (2 1/2")
127.0 mm (5")

Message Layout C

152.4 mm 2'-3"
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")
95.2 mm (3 3/4")
76.2 mm (3 ")

Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-6-6

 EI-01.04 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument
Size
Sign Face:
3658 mm H x 1524 mm W x 305
mm D
(12' 0" H x 5' 0" W x 1’ 0”)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated vertical
free standing monument sign for
identifying a medical center or the Baltimore
medical center’s main entrance Medical Center
drive.
VA Maryland
Health Care System
The base can be constructed of
concrete or other masonry material in VA Capitol
Health Care System
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Specific message configuration will

vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name
will need special approval from
Washington DC.

Graphic Process Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Baltimore William S. Middleton Tomah
Background: Refer to color chart Medical Center Memorial VA Medical Center
Accent: Refer to color chart VA Maryland
Veterans Hospital
Health Care System Madison

Recommendations VA Capitol
Health Care System
VA Great Lakes Great Lakes
Health Care System Health Care System
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low and position sprinklers so
they project away from the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Message Layout D Message Layout E Message Layout F
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

VA Medical Center VA VA
Regional Office Regional Office Oupatient Clinic

White River Junction Phoenix Appleton

VA New England Great Lakes

Health Care System Health Care System

12/2012 Page 4-6-7

 EI-01.04 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument
1522.5 mm
(5'-0") 303.4 mm
228.6 mm (9") (1'-0")

266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
190.5 mm (7 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
3657.6 mm 76.2 mm (3")
(12'-0") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

1524.0 mm
(5'-0")

25.4 mm (1")
76.2 mm (3")
304.8 mm (1'-0")
25.4 mm (1")

Message Layout A
Message Layout A
228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")

50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
127.0 mm (5")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")

1524.0 mm 1524.0 mm
(5'-0") (5'-0")

Message
Message Layout
Layout B B Message
Message Layout
Layout C C

228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")

50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

76.2 mm (3") 76.2 mm (3")

63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

1524.0 mm
(5'-0")

Message
Message Layout
Layout D &D
F MessageLayout
Message Layout
E E
&F

12/2012 Page 4-6-8

 EI-01.05 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument
Size
Sign Face:
2440 mm H x 1220 mm W
x 305 mm D
(8' 0" H x 4' 0" W x 1'-0" D)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated small free Baltimore
standing vertical monument sign for Medical Center
identifying a medical center where
there is a space limitation. This VA Maryland
Health Care System
sign can also be used to identify
secondary drive entrances to the VA Capitol
Health Care System
medical center.

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Specific message configuration will Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C
vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name
will need special approval from
Washington DC.
Baltimore William S. Middleton Tomah
Graphic Process Medical Center Memorial VA Medical Center
Illuminated, routed out copy backed Veterans Hospital
with white translucent acrylic. VA Maryland
Health Care System Madison

Colors VA Capitol
Health Care System
VA Great Lakes
Health Care System
VA Great Lakes
Health Care System
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Accent: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low and position sprinklers so
they project away from the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be Message Layout D Message Layout E Message Layout F
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

VA Medical Center VA VA
Regional Office Regional Office Oupatient Clinic

White River Junction Phoenix Appleton

VA New England VA Great Lakes

Health Care System Health Care System

12/2012 Page 4-6-9

 EI-01.05 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument

1218.0 mm
(4'-0") 303.4 mm
177.8 mm (7") (1'-0")

215.9 mm (8 1/2")

406.4 mm (1'-4")

203.2 mm (8")
2438.4 mm
82.6 mm (3 1/4")
(8'-0")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
82.6 mm (3 1/4")
190.5 mm (7 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
31.8 mm (1 1/4")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
50.8 mm (2")
31.8 mm (1 1/4")
50.8 mm (2")

736.6 mm (2'-4")
25.4 mm (1")
76.2 mm (3")
304.8 mm (1'-0")
25.4 mm (1")

Message Layout A

177.8 mm (7") 177.8 mm (7")

215.9 mm (8 1/2") 215.9 mm (8 1/2")

406.4 mm (1'-4") 406.4 mm (1'-4")

203.2 mm (8") 203.2 mm (8")

82.6 mm (3 1/4") 82.6 mm (3 1/4")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2") 319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
82.6 mm (3 1/4") 82.6 mm (3 1/4")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
82.6 mm (3 1/4")
152.4 mm (6")
31.8 mm (1 1/4")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
31.8 mm (1 1/4") 31.8 mm (1 1/4")
50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")

736.6 mm (2'-4")
736.6 mm (2'-4")

Message Layout B Message Layout C

177.8 mm (7") 177.8 mm (7")

215.9 mm (8 1/2") 215.9 mm (8 1/2")

406.4 mm (1'-4") 406.4 mm (1'-4")

203.2 mm (8") 203.2 mm (8")

82.6 mm (3 1/4") 82.6 mm (3 1/4")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2") 319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
82.6 mm (3 1/4") 82.6 mm (3 1/4")
190.5 mm (7 1/2") 190.5 mm (7 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")

50.8 mm (2")
31.8 mm (1 1/4")
50.8 mm (2")

736.6 mm (2'-4")

Message Layout D & F Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-6-10

 EI-02.01 Exterior Signs
Monument Primary Directional
Size
Sign Face
1829 mm H x 1829 mm W x 305
Outpatient Entrance
mm D
(6' 0" H x 6' 0" W x 1’ 0” D) Main Entrance
Description & Use Building 137, 332, 323, 325, 303,
Internally Illuminated Large 305, 205, 647, 348, 349, 350,
directional monument sign with 10
stacking strips. Directional sign with T101 & T102
messages directed specifically to
drivers.
Freight Entrance
Internally illuminated sign should be Building 314, 317 & 319
used only in locations where there
is a heavy night time driver need for
directional information. Monument
type directional signs should only be
used on the main entrance drive and
in front of the medical center.
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Layout A is for the first line of text
with an arrow of direction.
Layout B is for message with no arrow
which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.
Layout C is for indented text. This is Message Layout A
for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.
Graphic Process
Outpatient Entrance
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.
Colors Message Layout B
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Recommendations
Building 440
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Message Layout C
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.
Administration
Always leave a blank copy strip
between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the ability
of the driver to quickly read grouped
directional information.
Always leave a blank strip at the top
of the sign. This strip is smaller than
the text strips.
Configure a sign with at least one
blank copy strip at the bottom of the
sign. This will aid in the ability of the
driver to read the sign.
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-11

 EI-02.01 Exterior Signs
Monument Primary Directional

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-6-12

 EI-02.02 Exterior Signs
Monument Secondary Directional
Size
Sign Face:
1829 mm H x 1219 mm W x 305
mm D
(6' 0" H x 4' 0" W x 1’ 0” D)
Outpatient Entrance
Description & Use
Internally Illuminated small Main Entrance
directional monument sign with 10 Building 137, 332,
stacking strips. Directional sign with
messages directed specifically to 323, 325, 303, 305,
drivers. 205, 647, 348, 349,
Internally illuminated sign should be 350, T101 & T102
used only in locations where there
is a heavy night time driver need for
directional information. Monument Freight Entrance
type directional signs should only be Building 314,
used on the main entrance drive and
in front of the medical center. 317 & 319
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Layout A is for the first line of text
with an arrow of direction.
Layout B is for message with no arrow
which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.
Layout C is for indented text. This is
for situations where the message has Message Layout A
to run over onto a second copy bar.
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed Outpatient Entrance
with white translucent acrylic.
Colors
Text: White Message Layout B
Background: Refer to color chart

Building 440
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of Message Layout C
the sign.
Always leave a blank copy strip
between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the
Administration
ability of the driver to read grouped
directional information more quickly.
Always leave a blank strip at the top
of the sign. This strip is smaller than
the text strips.
Configure a sign with at least one
blank copy strip at the bottom of the
sign. This will aid in the ability of the
driver to read the sign.
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-13

 EI-02.02 Exterior Signs
Monument Secondary Directional

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-6-14

 EI-03.01 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 2438 mm W
(4' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1981 mm (6' 6")

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated large post and
panel sign for identifying a medical
center where there is a space
limitation or there are other physical
restraints that prevent a monument
sign from being installed. This sign, Tomah VA Medical Center
in a non-illuminated version, can
also be used to identify secondary
drive entrances to the medical
center. VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

The specific message configuration

will vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name
will need special approval from
Washington DC.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic. Message Layout C Message Layout D

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Posts: Refer to color chart Tomah VA Medical Center VA Medical Center
Regional Office
White River Junction
Recommendations
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network VA New England Health Care Network
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Message Layout E Message Layout F
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use. VA Regional Office VA Outpatient Clinic
Phoenix Appleton

VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

12/2012 Page 4-6-15

 EI-03.01 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Building Identification
177.8 mm
(7")

76.2 mm (3")

685 mm (2'-3")
91.4 mm (3 1/2") 152.4 mm
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")

63.5 mm (2 1/2")
127.0 mm (5")

1979.6 mm
(6'-6")

Message Layout C

685 mm (2'-3")
152.4 mm
(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

127 mm (5")
1219.2.0 mm
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
(4'-0") 57.1 mm (2 1/4")
88.9 mm (3 1/2 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")
76.2 mm (3 ")

57.1 mm (2 1/4")

Message Layout D 685 mm (2'-3")

152.4 mm 685 mm (2'-3")

(6")

5 1/2"

431.8mm (1'-5")

1219.2.0 mm 165.1 mm (6 1/2")

(4'-0") 101.6 mm (4 ")
95.2 mm (3 3/4")
76.2 mm (3 ")

Message Layout E

685 mm (2'-3")

76.2 mm 381.0 mm (1'-3")

(3")
1218.1 mm 177.8 mm (7")
(4'-0") 91.4 mm (3 1/2")
91.4 mm (3 1/2")
61.7 mm (2 1/2")

50.8 mm (2")
127.0 mm (5")

Message Layout F

12/2012 Page 4-6-16

 EI-03.02 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Panel
Size
Sign Face:
1220 mm H x 1830 mm W
(4' 0" H x 6' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1981 mm (6' 6")

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated post and Main Entrance
panel directional sign with messages Visitor Information
directed specifically to drivers. Building 101
Message Configuration Visitor Parking
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Buildings 222, 333, 323
233 & T444
Message size and layout should
adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Layouts illustrated
show small, medium and large size
text. Smaller text than shown should
not be used as the messages will be
unreadable to drivers. Larger text
than shown will result in words that
may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart Message Layout A Message Layout B
Posts: Refer to color chart

Recommendations Main Entrance

Visitor Information
Main Entrance
This type of directional sign should
be used only when the particular Building 101 Visitor
message that it will contain is not
likely to change. Visitor Parking Information
Buildings 222, 333, 323
Directional information for services 233 & T444
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.

Always leave space between groups

of directional information. This will
aid in the ability of the driver to read Message Layout C
grouped directional information
more quickly.
Main Entrance
Generally, configure a sign with blank Visitor Information
space at the bottom of the sign. This
will aid in the ability of the driver to
Building 101
read the sign.
Visitor Parking
Position sign so drivers have a clear, Building 222, 333
unobstructed view of the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-17

 EI-03.02 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Panel

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-6-18

 EI-04.01 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Directional
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 2438 mm W
(4' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1981 mm (6' 6")
Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Description & Use
Internally Illuminated large/long
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
auto oriented stacking 8 directional 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102
sign strips with messages directed
specifically to drivers. Internally
illuminated sign to be used only Freight Entrance
in locations where there is a Buildings 314, 317 & 319
heavy night time driver need for
directional information.

Message Configuration
(Refer to construction drawing for
dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process Message Layout A

Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic. Outpatient Entrance
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart Message Layout B
Posts: Refer to color chart

Recommendations Building 440

Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Message Layout C
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of Administration Entrance
the sign.

Always leave a blank copy strip

between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with at

least one blank copy strip at the Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102
ability of the driver to read the sign. Freight Entrance
It will also allow for an additional line Buildings 314, 317 & 319

of text to be added to the sign in the

future.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer, EI-04.01A (8 Strip)
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-19

 EI-04.01 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Directional

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-6-20

 EI-04.02 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Directional
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 1829 mm W
(4' 0" H x 6' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1829 mm (6' 0")
Outpatient Entrance
Description & Use
Main Entrance
Internally Illuminated standard
auto oriented stacking 8 strip bar Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
directional sign with messages
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
directed specifically to drivers.
Internally illuminated sign to be 350, T101 & T102
used only in locations where there
is a heavy night time driver need
for directional information. Freight Entrance

Message Configuration
(Refer to construction drawing for
dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed Message Layout A
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Outpatient Entrance
Background: Refer to color chart
Posts: Refer to color chart

Recommendations Message Layout B

Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Building 440
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign. Message Layout C
Always leave a blank copy strip
between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the
Administration Entrance
ability of the driver to read grouped
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with at

least one blank copy strip at the
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read the sign.
Outpatient Entrance
It will also allow for an additional Main Entrance
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
line of text to be added to the sign 303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
350, T101 & T102
in the future without having to order
Freight Entrance
another copy strip.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of EI-O4.02A (8 Strip)
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-21

 EI-04.02 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Directional

76 mm (3”)

178 mm (7”)

1829 mm (6’ - 0”)

1219 mm (4’ - 0”)

1829 mm (6’ - 0”)

114.3 mm (4’-1/2”)
76.2 mm (3”) 50.8 mm (2”)
EQ.

152.4 mm (6”) 76.2 mm (3”)

Message Layout A EQ.

241.3 mm (9’-1/2”)
EQ.

152.4 mm (6”) 76.2 mm (3”)

EQ.
Message Layout B

EQ.

76.2 mm (3”)

EQ.

12/2012 Page 4-6-22

 EI-06.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Overhead
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 2438 mm W
(2' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Description & Use

Internally illuminated overhead wall
mounted identification sign for a
stand alone building, that is not a

Nursing Home Care

medical center. This sign type can
also be used to identify an entrance
to a building.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message Layout A, B and C are for

identifying an entrance to a building.

Message Layout D is for identifying

a non-medical center, stand alone
building, typically off campus.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
For a stand alone non medical
center building, use this type of
sign when there is not place to
install a free standing sign.

Use this type of sign for “titling”

major building entrances that have
a very high volume of patient and
visitor traffic and need to be clearly Nursing Home Care Spinal Rehabilitation
distinguished.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch. D
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use. Spinal Rehabilitation
Clinic Entrance Beverly Clinic
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

12/2012 Page 4-6-23

 EI-06.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Overhead

179.5 mm
2438 mm (8’ - 0”) (7”)

610 mm (2’ - 0”)

177.8 mm
(7”)

Message Layout A

127 mm (5”)

Message Layout B

152.4 mm (6”)
127 mm (5”)
63.5 mm (2-1/2”)

Message Layout C

6.2 mm
304.8 mm (3")
(1'-0")
292 mm
(11 1/2")
73.02 mm (2 7/8")
114.3 mm (4 1/2") 88.9 mm (3 1/2")
44.5 mm (1 3/4")
146 mm (5 3/4") 88.9 mm (3 1/2")
53.9 mm (2 1/8")

82.5 mm (3 1/4")
60.3 mm (2 3/8")
44.5 mm (1 3/4")
Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-6-24

 EI-06.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated large wall
mounted sign type that can be
used to identify a building on a
medical center campus. It also can
be used for identification of a stand
alone building that is not a medical
center and there is no place to Outpatient
install a free standing sign. Center
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message Layout A is for identifying

a non-medical center stand alone
building, typically off campus.

Message Layout B and C are for

identifying building on a medical
center campus.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations Building
For a stand alone non medical
center building, use this type of
sign when there is not place to
install a free standing sign.
Outpatient
Center
230
Use this type of sign for “titling”
building entrances that have a
very high volume of patient and
visitor traffic and needs to be
clearly distinguished. It also can be
use on a building that is set back
a considerable distance from the
roadway.
Building
Position the sign adjacent the main
entrance, if possible. If the sign is not
readable in this position, then locate
230
on the corner of the building. Admissions
This large sign should not be used
Outpatient
on small buildings or buildings with Rehabilitation
minor uses.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-25

 EI-06.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification

178 mm (7”)

63.5 mm (2-1/2”)
82.3 mm (3 1/4")
114.3 mm (4 1/2")
41.27 mm (1 5/8")
1/8" 41.27 mm (1 5/8")
Rule
69.8 mm (2 3/4")

Message Layout A

63.5 mm (2-1/2”)
76.2 mm (3”)
76.2 mm (3”)
76.2 mm (3”)
254 mm (10”)

Message Layout B

1219 mm (4-0”)
63.5 mm (2-1/2”)
76.2 mm (3”)
76.2 mm (3”)
76.2 mm (3”)
203.2 mm (8”)
914 mm (3-0”) 76.2 mm (3”)
76.2 mm (3”)
63.5 mm (2-1/2”)

101.6 mm (4”)

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-6-26

 EI-08.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 2438 mm W
(2' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated overhead wall
mounted sign to be placed above
the ambulance entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Conform to the layout shown.
AMBULANCE
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
ENTRANCE
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Sign Background: Red

Recommendations
Place sign in a position of the
building where it clearly identifies
the “Ambulance Entrance” and
is visible to both vehicles and
pedestrians.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

Message Layout A

AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE

12/2012 Page 4-6-27

 EI-08.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification

178 mm (7”)

2438 mm (8’ - 0”)

457.2 mm (1’ - 6”)
152.4 mm (6”) 101.6 mm (4”)

EQ.
610 mm (2’ - 0”)
457.2 mm (1’ - 6”)

EQ.

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 4-6-28

 EI-08.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated wall mounted
sign to be placed on the wall
adjacent to the ambulance
entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Conform to the layouts shown.
AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Sign Background: Red .

Recommendations
Place sign in a position of the
building where it clearly identifies
the “Ambulance Entrance” and
is visible to both vehicles and
pedestrians.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

Message Layout A Message Layout B

AMBULANCE AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE ENTRANCE

12/2012 Page 4-6-29

 EI-08.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-6-30

 EI-08.03 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1676 mm (5' 6")

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated post and
panel sign to be placed on
the roadway, adjacent to the
AMBULANCE
ambulance entrance to direct ENTRANCE
ambulance drivers to the correct
building entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Conform to the layouts shown.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors
Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Sign Background: Red
Post: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a Message Layout A Message Layout B
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer, AMBULANCE AMBULANCE
manual or photoelectric switch. ENTRANCE ENTRANCE
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-31

 EI-08.03 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Ambulance Entrance Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-6-32

 EI-09 Exterior Signs
Dimensional Building Identification Letters
Size
For the various sizes, refer to the
adjacent table.

Description & Use

Internal halo-illuminated, fabricated
metal dimensional letters and logo
Medical Center
for identifying a facility.

This sign should be placed on the

medical center building in a location
that is highly visible to the public.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
Medical
for dimensions)

Letters used with the logo should

Center
read “Medical Center”, “Outpatient
Center” or “Veterans Affairs”.

Graphic Process
Fabricated aluminum letters with
internal LED lighting. Letters are
pin mounted off wall to allow light
to wash wall and halo illuminate
W Z
letters.

Colors
White, black, silver or dark bronze.
Letter to have high contrast to the
building wall color or material. For
X

example use white on red brick, not

Y
black.

Illumination color is white light.

Recommendations
Large size letters and logo are
intended for use on the top of the
building as a skyline sign. Sign Type Y Z X W

These letters require clear access to 450 mm 150 mm 1050 mm 350 mm

the back (inside) of the wall on which EI09.6
(18") (6") (42") (19")
they will be installed.
600 mm 150 mm 1350 mm 475 mm
EI09.7
(24") (6") (56") (25")
On-off illumination of sign can be
750 mm 150 mm 1800 mm 575 mm
controlled through the use of a timer, EI09.8
(30") (6") (70") (31")
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of 900 mm 150 mm 2100 mm 700 mm
EI09.9
(36") (6") (84") (38")
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-33

 EI-09 Exterior Signs
Dimensional Building Identification Letters

Outpatient Entrance

Medical Center

Medical Center

12/2012 Page 4-6-34

 EI-14 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Site Monument Kiosk
Size
Sign Face:
4726 mm H x 1524 mm W x 1524
mm D (15' 6" H x 5' 0" W x 5’ 0” D)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated vertical
free standing monument sign for
identifying a medical center or the Baltimore
medical center’s main entrance Medical Center
drive. VA Maryland
Health Care System
The base may be constructed of
concrete or other masonry material in
VA Capitol
Health Care System

a color and texture that will provide

a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Specific message configuration will

vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name will
need special approval from VACO,
Washington DC.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.
Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D
Colors
Text: White
Backgorund: Refer to color chart.
Accent: Refer to color chart.

Recommendations Baltimore William S. Middleton Tomah VA Medical Center

Medical Center Memorial VA Medical Center Regional Office
Position sign so drivers have a VA Maryland
Veterans Hospital

clear, unobstructed view of the Health Care System Madison White River Junction

sign. Keep landscaping around the VA Capitol

Health Care System
VA Great Lakes
Health Care System
Great Lakes
Health Care System
VA New England
Health Care System

sign low and position sprinklers so

they project away from the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual, or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-35

 EI-14 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Site Monument Kiosk

1522.5 mm
(5'-0")
228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
190.5 mm (7 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

4419.6 mm
(14'-6")

2286.0 mm
(7'-6")

304.8 mm (1'-0")

Message Layout A

228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")

50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2") 304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
127.0 mm (5") 76.2 mm (3")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")

4419.6 mm
(14'-6")

2286.0 mm 2286.0 mm 2286.0 mm

(7'-6") (7'-6") (7'-6")

Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-6-36

 EI-15.01 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Monument Kiosk with Directional
Size
Sign Face:
4572 mm H x 1524 mm W x 1524
mm D
(15' 0 " H x 5' 0" W x 5’ 0” D)

Description & Use

Internally Illuminated vertical
free standing monument sign for
identifying a medical center or the William S. Middleton
medical center’s main entrance Memorial
drive. Veterans Hospital
Madison
Lower section of sign has modular
changeable sign panels that can be VA Great Lakes
used for directional information. Health Care System

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical Main Entrance
Clinics
center.
Outpatient Entrance

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing Visitor Parking
for dimensions) Taylor Entrance
Freight Receiving Entrance
Specific message configuration will
vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name
will need special approval from
Washington DC.

Care is to be taken when preparing

directional text and arrow
direction. Pay particular attention
to the directional messages being
communicate relative to the signs
orientation.

Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.
Baltimore William S. Middleton Tomah VA Medical Center
Medical Center Memorial VA Medical Center Regional Office
Colors Veterans Hospital
Text: White VA Maryland
Health Care System Madison White River Junction
Background: Refer to color chart
Accent: Refer to color chart VA Capitol
Health Care System
VA Great Lakes
Health Care System
Great Lakes
Health Care System
VA New England
Health Care System

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
Main Entrance Main Entrance Main Entrance Main Entrance
sign. Keep landscaping around the Clinics Clinics Clinics Clinics
sign low and position sprinklers so Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance
they project away from the sign.
Visitor Parking Visitor Parking Visitor Parking Visitor Parking
Taylor Entrance Taylor Entrance Taylor Entrance Taylor Entrance
On-off illumination of sign can be Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-37

 EI-15.01 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Monument Kiosk with Directional

1522.5 mm
(5'-0")
228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
2995 mm (9'-6") 190.5 mm (7 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

762.0 mm (2'-6")

1370 mm (4'-6")

Message Layout A

228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2") 304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
127.0 mm (5") 76.2 mm (3")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")

762.0 mm (2'-6") 762.0 mm (2'-6") 762.0 mm (2'-6")

Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-6-38

 EI-15.02 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Monument Kiosk with Directional & Address
Size
Overall Sign:
4726 mm H x 1524 mm W x1524
mm D
(15' 6" H x 5' 0" W x 5’ 0” D)

Description & Use William S. Middleton

Internally Illuminated vertical Memorial
free standing monument sign for Veterans Hospital
identifying a medical center or the Madison
medical center’s main entrance
VA Great Lakes
drive. Health Care System

Lower section of sign has modular

changeable sign panels that can be
used for directional information.

The base can be constructed of

concrete or other masonry material in Main Entrance
a color and texture that will provide Clinics
Outpatient Entrance
a coordinated architectural look with Freight Receiving Entrance
the building finishes of the medical
center.
2500
Overlook Terrace
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions).

Specific message configuration will

vary depending on the particular
name of a facility. Variations to the
presentation of a facility’s name will
need special approval from VACO, Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D
Washington DC.

Care is to be taken when preparing

directional text and arrow
direction. Pay particular attention
Baltimore William S. Middleton Tomah VA Medical Center
to the directional messages being Medical Center Memorial VA Medical Center Regional Office
communicate relative to the signs VA Maryland
Veterans Hospital

orientation. Health Care System Madison White River Junction

VA Capitol VA Great Lakes Great Lakes VA New England

Health Care System Health Care System Health Care System Health Care System
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Colors Main Entrance Main Entrance

Main Entrance Main Entrance
Text: White Clinics Clinics Clinics Clinics
Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance
Background: Refer to color chart. Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance Freight Receiving Entrance

Accent: Refer to color chart.

2500 2500 2500 2500
Recommendations Overlook Terrace Overlook Terrace Overlook Terrace Overlook Terrace

Position sign so drivers have a

clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low and position sprinklers so
they project away from the sign.

On-off illumination of sign can be

controlled through the use of a timer,
manual, or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-39

 EI-15.02 Exterior Signs
4 Panel Monument Kiosk with Directional & Address

1522.5 mm
(5'-0")
228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
2995 mm (9'-6") 190.5 mm (7 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

762.0 mm (2'-6")

406 mm (1'-4") 31 mm (1 1/4")

1370 mm (4'-6")

Message Layout A

228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9") 228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2") 266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8") 508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0") 304.8 mm(1'-0")

103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4") 103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2") 304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
127.0 mm (5") 76.2 mm (3")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")
38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2") 38.1 mm (1 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2") 63.5 mm (2 1/2")

762.0 mm (2'-6") 762.0 mm (2'-6") 762.0 mm (2'-6")

31 mm (1 1/4") 31 mm (1 1/4") 31 mm (1 1/4")

Message Layout B Message Layout C Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-6-40

 EI-16.01 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument with Electronic Message Center
Size
Sign Face:
3658 mm H x 1524 mm W
(15' 0" H x 5' 0" W)
Description & Use
Internally Illuminated vertical
free standing monument sign for
identifying a medical center or the
medical center’s main entrance
drive. Baltimore
Medical Center
Electronic message centers are
available from several manufacturers. VA Maryland
These units are computer driven and Health Care System
require a data connection to the sign.
Contact a local sign company for site VA Capitol
Health Care System
evaluation and feasibility along with
the affiliated costs of connecting the
message center to a computer. Sign
face size may need to be adjusted
to match to message center size
constraints. Blood
Technology for electronic message Pressure
centers is consistently advancing. Screening
Evaluate several manufacturers by 7/11
examining the type of electronic
display they sell. Look at the display
in the same sun path orientation 2500
Overlook Terrace
that the sign will be installed. Direct
sunlight on a display can alter it’s
ability to be read clearly.
The base can be constructed of
concrete or other masonry material in
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
center.
Message Configuration
Refer to Sign Type EI-15.02 for
message layout and configuration.

Blood
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.

Pressure
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Screening
Accent: Refer to color chart
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Keep landscaping around the
sign low. Position sprinklers so they
do not spray the sign.
When evaluating electronic message
7/11
centers, consider a maintenance/
service contract and have several
people trained in operation and
message implementation.
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-41

 EI-16.01 Exterior Signs
Vertical Site Monument with Electronic Message Center

1522.5 mm
(5'-0")
228.6 mm (9")

266.7 mm (10-1/2")

508 mm (1'-8")

304.8 mm(1'-0")
103.3 mm (4")
50.8 mm (2")
103.3 mm (4")
2995 mm (9'-6") 190.5 mm (7 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
319.3 mm (1'-1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

762.0 mm (2'-6")

762 mm (2'-6")

406 mm (1'-4") 31 mm (1 1/4")

1370 mm (4'-6")

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 4-6-42

 EI-16.02 Exterior Signs
Horizontal Site Monument with Electronic Message Center
Size
Sign Face:
2895 mm H x 3886 mm W x 535 mm D
(9' 6" H x 12' 9" W x 1' 9" D)
Description & Use
Internally Illuminated vertical
free standing monument sign for
Baltimore VA Medical Center
identifying a medical center or the
VA Maryland Health Care System
medical center’s main entrance
drive. VA Capitol Health Care Network

Electronic message centers are

available from several manufacturers. FLU SHOTS 10/17 - 20
These units are computer driven and
require a data connection to the sign. CLINIC A
Contact a local sign company for site
evaluation and feasibility along with
the affiliated costs of connecting the
message center to a computer. Sign
face size may need to be adjusted to
match message center constraints.
Technology for electronic message
centers is consistently advancing.
Evaluate several manufacturers by
examining the type of electronic
display they sell. Look at the display in
the same sun path orientation that the
sign will be installed. Direct sunlight
on a display can alter its ability to be
read clearly.
The base may be constructed of
concrete or other masonry material in
FLU SHOTS 10/17 - 20
a color and texture that will provide
a coordinated architectural look with
the building finishes of the medical
CLINIC A
center.
Message Configuration
Refer to Sign Type EI-01.01 for
message layout and configuration.
Graphic Process
Illuminated, routed out copy backed
with white translucent acrylic.
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart.
Accent: Refer to color chart.
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the sign.
Keep landscaping around the sign
low and position sprinklers so they
project away from the sign.
When evaluating electronic message
centers, consider a maintenance/
service contract and have several
people trained in operation and
message implementation.
On-off illumination of sign can be
controlled through the use of a timer,
manual or photoelectric switch.
Consult with sign fabricator at time of
order for appropriate method to use.

12/2012 Page 4-6-43

 EI-16.02 Exterior Signs
Horizontal Site Monument with Electronic Message Center

3886 mm (12'-9") 533 mm (1'-9")

203.2 mm 2'-9"
(8")
7"
533.4mm (1'-9")

1524.0 mm 214.7 mm (8 1/2")

(5'-0") 120.8 mm (4 3/4")
120.8 mm (4 3/4")
2895 mm 88.9 mm (3 1/2")
214.7 mm (8 1/2")
(9’ 6”)"
63.5 mm (2 1/2")

685 mm (2'-3")

18 mm (1'-6")

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 4-6-44

 Exterior Signs

Non-Illuminated
Exterior Signs

12/2012 Page 4-6-45

This page is intentionally left blank
 EN-02.01 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Monument
Size
Sign Face:
1829 mm H x 1829 mm W
(6' 0" H x 6' 0" W)

Description
Large, non-illuminated 10 strip
directional monument sign with
messages directed specifically to
drivers. Monument type directional
signs should only be used on the
main entrance drive and in front of
the medical center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy strip.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors Message Layout A

Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Message Layout B

Directional information for services

ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.

Always leave a blank copy strip

between groups of directional Message Layout C
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped
directional information more quickly.

Always leave a blank strip at the top This layout shows an indentation for a second line of copy
of the sign. This strip is smaller than
the text strips.

Configure a sign with at least one

blank copy strip at the bottom of the
sign. This will aid in the ability of the
driver to read the sign.

12/2012 Page 4-7-1

 EN-02.01 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Monument

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-2

 EN-02.02 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Monument
Size
Sign Face:
1829 mm H x 1219 mm W
(6' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Description
Small, non-illuminated 10 strip
directional monument sign with
messages directed specifically to
drivers. Monument type directional
signs should only be used on the
main entrance drive and in front of
the medical center.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors Message Layout A

Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Message Layout B
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.

Always leave a blank copy strip

between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped Message Layout C
directional information more quickly.

Always leave a blank strip at the top

of the sign. This strip is smaller than
the text strips.
This layout shows an indentation for a second line of copy
Configure a sign with at least one
blank copy strip at the bottom of the
sign. This will aid in the ability of the
driver to read the sign.

12/2012 Page 4-7-3

 EN-02.02 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Monument

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-4

 EN-03.02 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Panel
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 1829 mm W
(4' 0" H x 6' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1981 mm (6' 6")
Main Entrance
Description Visitor Information
Standard non-illuminated auto Building 101
oriented post and panel sign with
messages directed specifically to Visitor Parking
drivers. Buildings 222, 333, 323
Message Configuration
233 & T444
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Layouts illustrated
show small, medium and large size
text. Smaller text than shown should
not be used as the messages will be
unreadable to drivers. Larger text
than shown will result in words that
may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart Message Layout A Message Layout B
Post: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Main Entrance
Visitor Information
Main Entrance
This type of directional sign should
be used only when the particular
Building 101 Visitor
message that it will contain is not Visitor Parking Information
likely to change. Buildings 222, 333, 323
Directional information for services 233 & T444
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.

Always leave space between groups

of directional information. This will
aid in the ability of the driver to read Message Layout C
grouped directional information
more quickly. Main Entrance
Generally, configure a sign with blank Visitor Information
space at the bottom of the sign. This Building 101
will aid in the ability of the driver to
read the sign. Visitor Parking
Position sign so drivers have a clear, Building 222, 333
unobstructed view of the sign.

12/2012 Page 4-7-5

 EN-03.02 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Panel

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-6

 EN-03.03 Exterior Signs
Secondary Post and Panel
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1676 mm (5' 6")

Description Main Entrance

Small non-illuminated post and Building 101
panel sign with messages directed
specifically to drivers. This sign can Visitor Parking
also be used to identify buildings. Buildings 222,
Message Configuration 233 & T444
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Layouts illustrated
show small, medium and large size
text. Smaller text than shown should
not be used as the messages will be
unreadable to drivers. Larger text
than shown will result in words that
may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Main Entrance Building

230
Post: Refer to color chart Building 101
Recommendations Visitor Parking
As a directional sign it should be Buildings 222,
used only when the particular 233 & T444
message that it will contain is not
likely to change and directional
information for services ahead
should always be at the top of the
sign.

Always leave space between groups Message Layout D

of directional information. This will
aid in the ability of the driver to read Building

230
grouped directional information
more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with blank Admissions

space at the bottom of the sign. This Outpatient
will aid in the ability of the driver to Beverly Clinic
read the sign.
Rehabilitation VA Great Lakes Health Care System

Position sign so drivers have a clear,

unobstructed view of the sign.

12/2012 Page 4-7-7

 EN-03.03 Exterior Signs
Secondary Post and Panel

Message Layout A

Message Layout B
Message Layout C

76.2 mm (3")
139.7 mm (5 1/2")
44.4 mm (1 3/4")
44.4 mm (1 3/4")
76.2 mm (3")
50.8 mm (2")
76.2 mm (3")
114.3 mm (4 1/2")
88.9 mm (3 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
38.7 mm (1 1/2")

Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-7-8

 EN-03.04 Exterior Signs
Secondary Post and Panel
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 914 mm W
(2' 0" H x 3' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1524 mm (5' 0")
Admissions
Description Outpatient
Rehabilitation
Non-illuminated, post and panel Dental Clinic
sign directional sign with messages Eye Clinic
directed specifically to pedestrians.
Also, the sign can be used to
identify buildings.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Smaller text than
shown should not be used as the
messages will be unreadable. Larger
text than shown will result in words
that may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Colors
Text: White

Building
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart Building
230 230
Recommendations
Position sign so pedestrians have
a clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Admissions
Outpatient Rehabilitation

Message Layout C

Admissions
Outpatient
Rehabilitation
Dental Clinic
Eye Clinic

12/2012 Page 4-7-9

 EN-03.04 Exterior Signs
Secondary Post and Panel

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-10

 EN-03.05 Exterior Signs
Primary Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 914 mm W
(3' 0" H x 3' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1676 mm (5' 6")
Building

230
Description
Large, non-illuminated auto
oriented building number/
identification post and panel sign
for identification of a building when
a large sign is needed because the
building is set back away from the
roadway or the architectural scale
(size) of the building warrants a
large sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Layouts illustrated
show small, medium and large size
text. Smaller text than shown should
not be used as the messages will be
unreadable to drivers. Larger text
than shown will result in words that
may not fit on the sign.
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.
Building Building
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart
230 230
Admissions
Outpatient
Recommendations Rehabilitation
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

12/2012 Page 4-7-11

 EN-03.05 Exterior Signs
Primary Building Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-12

 EN-03.06 Exterior Signs
Secondary Building Identification & Informational
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1524 mm (5' 0")
Building
Description
Non-illuminated, pedestrian
oriented building number/
230
identification post and panel
sign. This sign can be used for
other general applications from
information text to identifying
specific functions or activities.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should

adjust to the volume of information
being presented. Layouts illustrated
show various sizes of text. Smaller
text than shown should not be used
as the messages will be unreadable.
Larger text than shown will result in
words that may not fit on the sign.
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Graphic Process

Building Building
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart
230 230
Admissions
Recommendations Dental Clinic
Position sign so drivers and
pedestrians have a clear view. This
sign has a limited viewing range for
drivers because of its small size. Message Layout C Message Layout D

No Smoking Smoking
Area Area

Message Layout E

For after hours

information
& VA police
use telephone
located at
building 334.

12/2012 Page 4-7-13

 EN-03.06 Exterior Signs
Secondary Building Identification & Informational

Message Layout A

Message Layout B Message Layout C & D Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-7-14

 EN-04.01 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Stacking Bar
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 2438 mm W
(4' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height: Outpatient Entrance

1981 mm (6' 6")
Main Entrance
Description Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
Large/long, non-illuminated auto
205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102
oriented 6-8 stacking bar directional
sign.
Freight Entrance
Message Configuration
(Refer to construction drawing for Buildings 314, 317 & 319
dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Message Layout A
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the Message Layout B
sign.
Building 338
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.
Message Layout C
Always leave a blank copy bar
between groups of directional Outpatient Entrance
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with

at least one blank copy bar at the
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read the sign.
It will also allow for an additional
line of text to be added to the sign Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance

in the future without having to order Main Entrance

Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
Main Entrance
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,
Main Entrance
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325, 303, 305,

another copy strip. 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102 205, 647, 348, 349, 350, T101 & T102

Freight Entrance Freight Entrance

Buildings 314, 317 & 319

EN-O4.01A (8 Bar) EN-O4.01B (7 Bar) EN-O4.01C (6 Bar)

12/2012 Page 4-7-15

 EN-04.01 Exterior Signs
Primary Directional Post and Stacking Bar

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-16

 EN-04.02 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 1829 mm W
(4' 0" H x 6' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1829 mm (6' 0")
Outpatient Entrance
Description Main Entrance
Standard non-illuminated auto
oriented 5 to 8 stacking bar Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
directional sign. 303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
Message Configuration 350, T101 & T102
(Refer to construction drawing for
dimensions) Freight Entrance
Layout A is for the first line of text
with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.
Message Layout A
Colors

AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a Message Layout B
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Building 338
Directional information for services
ahead should always be at the top of
the sign.
Message Layout C
Always leave a blank copy bar
between groups of directional
information. This will aid in the
Outpatient Entrance
ability of the driver to read grouped
The layout shows an indentation for a second line of copy
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with

at least one blank copy bar at the
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read the sign.
It will also allow for an additional Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance
Outpatient Entrance
Main Entrance

line of text to be added to the sign Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348, 349,
Buildings 137, 332, 323, 325,
303, 305, 205, 647, 348 & 349

in the future without having to order 350, T101 & T102 350, T101 & T102 350, T101 & T102

another copy bar. Freight Entrance

EN-O4.02A (8 Bar) EN-O4.02B (7 Bar) EN-O4.02C (6 Bar) EN-O4.02D (5 Bar)

12/2012 Page 4-7-17

 EN-04.02 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-18

 EN-04.03 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height: Outpatient Entrance

1676 mm (5' 6")
Main Entrance
Description Buildings 137, 332,
Small, non-illuminated auto
323, 325, 303, 305,
oriented 4 to 6 stacking bar
directional sign. 205, 647, 348 & 349

Message Configuration
(Refer to construction drawing for
dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.
Message Layout A
Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.
AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart Message Layout B

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the Building 338
sign.

Directional information for services

ahead should always be at the top of Message Layout C
the sign.

Always leave a blank copy bar

between groups of directional
Outpatient Entrance
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped This layout shows an indentation for a second line of copy
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with

at least one blank copy bar at the
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read the sign.
It will also allow for an additional
Outpatient Outpatient Outpatient
line of text to be added to the sign Entrance Entrance Entrance
in the future without having to order Main Entrance Main Entrance Main Entrance
another copy bar. Buildings 137, 332, Buildings 137 & 332
323, 325, 303 & 305

EN-O4.03A (6 Bar) EN-O4.03B (5 Bar) EN-O4.03C (4 Bar)

12/2012 Page 4-7-19

 EN-04.03 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-20

 EN-04.04 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 914 mm W
(2' 0" H x 3' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1524 mm (5' 0")
Outpatient Entrance
Description Main Entrance
Non-illuminated, pedestrian
oriented 3 to 4 stacking directional Buildings 137 & 332
bar sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to construction drawing for
dimensions)

Layout A is for the first line of text

with an arrow of direction.

Layout B is for message with no arrow

which is located immediately under a
copy bar with an arrow.

Layout C is for indented text. This is

for situations where the message has
to run over onto a second copy bar.

Graphic Process Message Layout A

Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.
AMBULANCE ENTRANCE
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart Message Layout B
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the Building 383
sign.

Directional information for services

ahead should always be at the top of Message Layout C
the sign.

Always leave a blank copy bar

between groups of directional
Outpatient Entrance
information. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read grouped This layout shows an indentation for a second line of copy
directional information more quickly.

Generally, configure a sign with

at least one blank copy bar at the
bottom of the sign. This will aid in the
ability of the driver to read the sign.
Outpatient Entrance Outpatient Entrance
It will also allow for an additional
Main Entrance Main Entrance
line of text to be added to the sign
Buildings 137 & 332
in the future without having to order
another copy bar.

EN-O4.04A (4 Bar) EN-O4.04B (3 Bar)

12/2012 Page 4-7-21

 EN-04.04 Exterior Signs
Secondary Directional Post and Stacking Bar

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-22

 EN-05.01 Exterior Signs
Large Single Post Informational
Size
Sign Face:
762 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 6" H x 2' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1829 mm (6' 0") Freight
Loading
Description Zone
Large, non-illuminated single post
identification, informational and
directional sign. This type of sign
is for miscellaneous uses and can
be utilized in landscape areas, at
the head of parking stalls, or in
other locations which have space
limitations.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message configurations shown

illustrate various adaptable uses for
this particular style of sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart Freight No
Recommendations Loading Smoking
Position sign so drivers have a Zone Medical Area
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Center
It is recommended that this type of
sign be placed in situations where a
smaller sign is required or a particular
situation precludes the use of a
double post and panel sign.
Message Layout D Message Layout E
When placing this type of sign
near curbs or parking places, be
sure the sign is set far enough back Authorized
Vehicles
No
that over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact Only Beyond Parking
with the sign post. This Point Patient
Pick Up &
Drop Off
Only

12/2012 Page 4-7-23

 EN-05.01 Exterior Signs
Large Single Post Informational

Message Layout A

1/8" Rule

50.8 mm (2")
101.6 mm (4")
38.1 mm (1 1/2")
76.2 mm (3")
88.9 mm (3 1/2")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
146 mm (5 3/4")

Message Layout B Message Layout C

Message Layout D Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-7-24

 EN-05.02 Exterior Signs
Medium Single Post Informational
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 457 mm W
(2' 0" H x 1' 6" W)

Overall Sign Height:

Freight
1829 mm (6' 0") Loading
Zone
Description
Standard, non-illuminated single
post identification, informational
and directional sign. This type
of sign is the standard one for
miscellaneous uses. It can be
utilized in landscape areas, at
the head of parking stalls, or in
other locations which have space
limitations which preclude the use
of a double post and panel sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message configurations shown

illustrate various adaptable uses for
this particular style of sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl. Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Colors
Text: White Freight No
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart Loading Smoking
Recommendations
Zone Medical Area
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
Center
sign.

When placing this type of sign

near curbs or parking places, be
sure the sign is set far enough back
that over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact Message Layout D Message Layout E
with the sign post.
Authorized No
Vehicles
Only Parking
Beyond Patient
This Point Pick Up &
Drop Off
Only

12/2012 Page 4-7-25

 EN-05.02 Exterior Signs
Medium Single Post Informational

Message Layout A

1/8" Rule
44.5 mm (1 3/4")
82.55 mm (3 1/4")
28.57 mm (1 1/8")
63.5 mm (2 1/2")
69.85 mm (2 3/4")

Message Layout B Message Layout C

Message Layout D Message Layout E

12/2012 Page 4-7-26

 EN-05.03 Exterior Signs
Small Single Post Informational
Size
Sign face:
457 mm H X 305 mm W
(1'6" H X 1'0" W)

Overall Sign High:

1829 mm (6' 0") Freight
Loading
Description Zone

Small, non-illuminated single post

identification and informational
sign. This type of sign is for
miscellaneous uses and can be
utilized in landscape areas at
the head of parking stalls, or in
other locations which have space
limitations. This type of sign would
be placed in situations where a
small sign is required.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message configurations shown,

Illustrate various adaptable uses for
this particular style of sign.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
Vinyl.
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart
Freight No
Loading Smoking
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a Zone Area
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

When placing this type of sign

near curbs or parking places, be
sure the sign is set far enough back
that over-hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
Message Layout C Message Layout D
with the sign post.

Authorized No
Vehicles
Only Parking
Beyond Patient
This Pick Up &
Point Drop Off
Only

12/2012 Page 4-7-27

 EN-05.03 Exterior Signs
Small Single Post Informational

Message Layout A

Message Layout B Message Layout C

Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-7-28

 EN-06.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Overhead
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 2438 mm W
(2' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated, overhead wall
mounted sign. Identification of a
stand alone building that is not a

Nursing Home Care

medical center. This sign type can
also be used to identify an entrance
to a building.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message Layout A, B and C are for

identifying an entrance to a building.

Message Layout D is for identifying

a non-medical center stand alone
building.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
For a stand alone non medical
center building, use this type of
sign when there is not place to
install a free standing sign.

Use this type of sign for “titling”

major building entrances that have
a very high volume of patient and
visitor traffic and need to be clearly
distinguished.

Nursing Home Care Spinal Rehabilitation

Spinal Rehabilitation
Clinic Entrance Beverly Clinic
VA Great Lakes Health Care Network

12/2012 Page 4-7-29

 EN-06.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Overhead

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

6.2 mm
304.8 mm (3")
(1'-0")
292 mm
(11 1/2")
73.02 mm (2 7/8")
114.3 mm (4 1/2")
88.9 mm (3 1/2")
44.5 mm (1 3/4")
146 mm (5 3/4") 88.9 mm (3 1/2")
53.9 mm (2 1/8")
82.5 mm (3 1/4")
60.3 mm (2 3/8")
44.5 mm (1 3/4")
Message Layout D

12/2012 Page 4-7-30

 EN-06.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Description
Large, non-illuminated wall
mounted sign This sign type can
be used to identify a building on a
medical center campus. It also can
be used for identification of a stand Building
alone building that is not a medical
center and there is not place to 230
install a free standing sign. Admissions
Outpatient
Message Configuration Rehabilitation
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message Layout A is for identifying

a non-medical center, stand alone
building.

Message Layout B and C are for

identifying building on a medical
center campus.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
For a stand alone non-medical Message Layout A Message Layout B
center building, use this type of
sign when there is not place to Building

230
install a free standing sign.

Use this type of sign for “titling”

building entrances that have a
very high volume of patient and
visitor traffic and needs to be
clearly distinguished. It also can be
use on a building that is set back
a considerable distance from the
roadway.

Position the sign adjacent the main

entrance, if possible. If the sign is not Message Layout C
readable in this position, then locate
on the corner of the building. Building
This large sign should not be used
on small buildings or buildings with
minor uses.
230
Admissions
Outpatient
Rehabilitation

12/2012 Page 4-7-31

 EN-06.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification

82.3 mm (3 1/4")
114.3 mm (4 1/2")
41.27 mm (1 5/8")
1/8" 41.27 mm (1 5/8")
Rule
69.8 mm (2 3/4")

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-32

 EN-06.03 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 914 mm W
(4' 0" H x 3' 0" W)

Description
Large, non-illuminated wall
mounted sign with separate name
panel. Building identification with
and without names of the occupant Building

230
or service. The secondary name
of the occupant or service is
on a changeable panel to allow
modification to the sign without
changing the entire sign.
Admissions
Message Configuration Outpatient
Rehabilitation
(Refer to message layout drawing
Dental Clinic
for dimensions)

Message layouts show application of

the sign with building identification
number and number with secondary
information.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Please Refer to color
chart

Recommendations Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Use on a building that is set back
a considerable distance from the
roadway. Building Building
Position the sign adjacent to or above
the main entrance, if possible. If the
sign is not readable in this position,
then locate on the corner of the
230 230
building.
Admissions Outpatient Center
This large sign should not be used Outpatient Los Angeles
on small buildings or buildings with
minor uses.
Rehabilitation
Dental Clinic

12/2012 Page 4-7-33

 EN-06.03 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

57.15 mm (2 1/4")

85.72 mm (3 3/8")
28.5 mm (1 1/8")
1/8" 28.5 mm (1 1/8")
Rule 60.3 mm (2 3/8")

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-34

 EN-06.04 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 914 mm W
(3' 0" H x 3' 0" W)

Description
Medium, non-illuminated
wall mounted sign. Building
identification. When names of the
occupant or service are used along
Building
with the building number, it should
be text that will not likely change.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
230
for dimensions)

Message layouts show application of

the sign with building identification
number and number with secondary
information.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Use on a building that is set back
a considerable distance from the
roadway.

Position the sign adjacent to or above

the main entrance, if possible. If the Message Layout A Message Layout B
sign is not readable in this position,
then locate on the corner of the
building.
Building Building
This large sign should not be used
on small buildings or buildings with
minor uses. 230 230
Admissions
Outpatient
Rehabilitation

12/2012 Page 4-7-35

 EN-06.04 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-36

 EN-06.05 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 610 mm W
(3' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description
Standard size, non-illuminated wall
mounted sign with separate name
panel. Building identification with
and without names of the occupant
or service. The secondary name
of the occupant or service is Building
on a changeable panel to allow
modification to the sign without 230
changing the entire sign.
Admissions
Outpatient
Message Configuration Rehabilitation
(Refer to message layout drawing Dental Clinic
for dimensions)

Message layouts show application of

the sign with building identification
number and number with secondary
information.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Use on any building. Position the
sign adjacent to or above the main
entrance, if possible. If the sign is Message Layout A Message Layout B
not readable in this position, then
locate on the corner of the building.
Building Building
230 230
Admissions
Outpatient
Rehabilitation
Dental Clinic

12/2012 Page 4-7-37

 EN-06.05 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-38

 EN-06.06 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description
Standard size, non-illuminated
wall mounted sign. Building
identification with and without
names of the occupant or service.
Building
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
230
Message layouts show application of
the sign with building identification
number and number with secondary
information.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Use on any building. Position the
sign adjacent to or above the main
entrance, if possible. If the sign is
not readable in this position, then
locate on the corner of the building.

Message Layout A Message Layout B

Building Building
230 230
Admissions
Dental Clinic

Message Layout C

Freight
Receiving

12/2012 Page 4-7-39

 EN-06.06 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Building Identification Sign

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-40

 EN-06.07 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Informational
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 457 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 6" W)

Description
Small, non-illuminated wall
mounted sign. This sign is for
miscellaneous uses such as
identifying minor entrances,
information messages, identifying Freight &
sheds and equipment buildings, Delivery
Entrance
etc.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layouts show ideas of type

sizes relative to possible different
uses and application of the sign type.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Use for general purpose minor sign
needs.

Message Layout A Message Layout B

Freight &
Delivery
Entrance
T28

12/2012 Page 4-7-41

 EN-06.07 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Informational

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-42

 EN-06.08 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Informational
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 305 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 0" W)

Description
Minor informational, non-
illuminated wall mounted sign.This
sign is for miscellaneous uses such
as identifying minor entrances,
information messages, identifying
sheds and equipment buildings, Freight &
Delivery
etc. Entrance

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layouts show ideas of type

sizes relative to possible different
uses and application of the sign type.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart

Recommendations
Use for general purpose minor sign
needs.

Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Freight & No Parking

Delivery Idling for
Contractors
Entrance & Vendors
Shut Down
Engines

Message Layout D Message Layout E Message Layout F

Parking
for
Government
Employees

Ramp
Access

12/2012 Page 4-7-43

 EN-06.08 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Informational

Message Layout A Message Layout B

Message Layout C
Message Layout D

Message Layout E Message Layout F

12/2012 Page 4-7-44

 EN-08.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 2438 mm W
(2' 0" H x 8' 0" W)

Description
Overhead, non-illuminated wall
mounted sign to be placed above
the ambulance entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
AMBULANCE
Conform to the layout shown.

Graphic Process
ENTRANCE
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Background: Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Background: Red .

Recommendations
Place sign in a position of the
building where it clearly identifies
the “Ambulance Entrance” and
is visible to both vehicles and
pedestrians.

Message Layout A

AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE

12/2012 Page 4-7-45

 EN-08.01 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 4-7-46

 EN-08.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated wall mounted sign
to be placed on the wall adjacent to
the ambulance entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Conform to the layouts shown.

AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE
Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Background: Red

Recommendations
Place sign in a position of the
building where it clearly identifies
the “Ambulance Entrance” and
is visible to both vehicles and
pedestrians.

Message Layout A Message Layout B

AMBULANCE AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE ENTRANCE

12/2012 Page 4-7-47

 EN-08.02 Exterior Signs
Wall Mounted Ambulance Entrance Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-48

 EN-08.03 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Ambulance Entrance Identification
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 1219 mm W
(3' 0" H x 4' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1676 mm (5' 6")

Description
Non-illuminated post and panel
sign to be placed on the roadway, AMBULANCE
adjacent to the ambulance
entrance to direct ambulance
ENTRANCE
drivers to the correct building
entrance.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Conform to the layouts shown.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Symbol Background: White
Background: Red
Post: Refer to color chart

Recommendations Message Layout A Message Layout B

Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

AMBULANCE AMBULANCE
ENTRANCE ENTRANCE

12/2012 Page 4-7-49

 EN-08.03 Exterior Signs
Post and Panel Ambulance Entrance Identification

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 4-7-50

 EN-09 Exterior Signs
Dimensional Letters
Size
For the various sizes, refer to the Outpatient Entrance
adjacent table.

Description
Non-illuminated dimensional letters
for identifying a facility. Should be Medical Center

placed on the building in a location

that is highly visible to the public.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Fabricated or cut out of aluminum
letters

Colors
White, black, silver or dark bronze.
Letter to have high contrast to the
building wall color or material. For
example, use white on red brick,
not black.
W
Z
Recommendations
Dimensional letters can be used on

Out
a building to identify the building.
Large letters and logo are intended
X

Y
for use on the top of the building as
a skyline sign.

Sign Type Y Z X W

100 mm 10 mm
EN-09.01
(4") (3/8")

150 mm 10 mm
EN-09.02
(6") (3/8")
200 mm 13 mm
EN-09.03
(8") (1/2")
250 mm 13 mm 575 mm 190 mm
EN-09.04
(10") (1/2") (23") (10")
300 mm 19 mm 675 mm 225 mm
EN-09.05
(12") (3/4") (27") (12")

450 mm 25 mm 1050 mm 350 mm

EN-09.06
(18") (1") (42") (19")
600 mm 50 mm 1350 mm 475 mm
EN-09.07
(24") (2") (56") (25")
750 mm 65 mm 1800 mm 575 mm
EN-09.08
(30") (2 1/2") (70") (31")
900 mm 75 mm 2100 mm 700 mm
EN-09.09
(36") (3") (84") (38")

12/2012 Page 4-7-51

 EN-09 Exterior Signs
Dimensional Letters

Outpatient Entrance

Medical Center

Medical Center

Z
Y

Sign Type Y Z

100 mm 10 mm
EN-09.01
(4") (3/8")

150 mm 10 mm
EN-09.02
(6") (3/8")
200 mm 13 mm
EN-09.03
(8") (1/2")
250 mm 13 mm
EN-09.04
(10") (1/2")
300 mm 19 mm
EN-09.05
(12") (3/4")

450 mm 25 mm
EN-09.06
(18") (1")
600 mm 50 mm
EN-09.07
(24") (2")
750 mm 65 mm
EN-09.08
(30") (2 1/2")
900 mm 75 mm
EN-09.09
(36") (3")

12/2012 Page 4-7-52

 EN-10 Exterior Signs
Traffic Regulatory Signs
Size
EN-10.01: Stop (R1-1): 24", 30", 36"
EN-10.02: Do Not Enter (R5-1):
30", 36"
EN-10.03: Yield (R1-2): 30", 36"
EN-10.04: Speed Limit (R2-8)
EN-10.05: Keep Right (R4-7A)
EN-10.06: One Way (R6-2L,
R6-2R)
EN-10.07: No Right/Left Turn (R3-
1R, R3-2L)
EN-10.08: No U Turn (R3-4)
EN-10.09: Pedestrian Crossing
(W11-2A)
Description
Traffic regulatory signs

Sign Use & Application

The “Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices for Streets and
Highways” has been adopted as
the standard for all Regulatory
and Warning Signs used on the
Department of Veterans Affairs
roadways for vehicular traffic.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions) EN-10.01 EN-10.02 EN-10.03

Text, text size, text position and

color must conform with the Manual
on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
(MUTCD)

Colors
Text & Background: “MUTCD”
standard colors;
Post: Refer to color chart. EN-10.04 EN-10.05 EN-10.06

Recommendations
Display the most commonly used
signs as indicated. If other Traffic
Regulatory and Warning Signs are
need, refer to MUTCD.

Position sign so drivers have a clear,

unobstructed view of the sign.

It should be noted that the decision

to use a particular traffic control EN-10.07 EN-10.08 EN-10.09
device at a specific location should
be made on the basis of a standard
traffic engineering study of the
location. Sign size should be based
on traffic conditions. Where these
conditions are the same, all signs of a
similar type should be the same size.

12/2012 Page 4-7-53

 EN-10 Exterior Signs
Traffic Regulatory Signs

EN-10.01 EN-10.02 EN-10.03

EN-10.04 EN-10.07 EN-10.10

EN-10.05 EN-10.08
EN-10.06

12/2012 Page 4-7-54

 EN-11.01 Exterior Signs
2 Blade Street Sign
Size
Blade: 152 mm H x 610 mm W
(6" H x 2'-0" W)
152 mm H x 762 mm W
(6" H x 2'-6" W) Street Name
152 mm H x 914 mm W
(6" H x 3'-0" W)
me
Description St et Na
rere
St et Na
Non-illuminated double blade name
sign for an intersection me
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Select size required for length of

name. Message will be the same
on both sides of the sign blade.
The following are some standard
abbreviations: Boulevard - BLVD;
Circle - CIR; Court - CT; Drive - DR;
Avenue - AVE; Lane - LN; Place - PL;
Road - RD;Street - ST;Terrace -TERR.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart
Message Layout A
Typography
Helvetica Bold Condensed

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Locate as close to intersection
as possible.
Main St.
Message Layout B

Main Street
Message Layout C

N. Main Street

12/2012 Page 4-7-55

 EN-11.01 Exterior Signs
2 Blade Street Sign

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-56

 EN-11.02 Exterior Signs
1 Blade Street Sign
Size
Blade: 152 mm H x 610 mm W
(6" H x 2' 0" W)
152 mm H x 762 mm W
(6" H x 2'-6" W) Street Name
152 mm H x 914 mm W
(6" H x 3'-0" W)

Description St
Tall, Non-illuminated single blade ree
tN
street name identification for a am
single street e

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Select size required for length of

name. Message will be the same
on both sides of the sign blade.
The following are some standard
abbreviations: Boulevard - BLVD;
Circle - CIR; Court - CT; Drive - DR;
Avenue - AVE; Lane - LN; Place - PL;
Road - RD;Street - ST;Terrace -TERR.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors
Text: White
Background: Refer to color chart
Post: Refer to color chart
Message Layout A
Typography

Main St.
Helvetica Bold Condensed

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Locate as close to intersection
as possible.

Message Layout B

Main Street
Message Layout C

N. Main Street

12/2012 Page 4-7-57

 EN-11.02 Exterior Signs
1 Blade Street Sign

Message Layout A

Message Layout B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-58

 EN-11.03 Exterior Signs
Pylon Street Sign
Size
Blade: 1524 mm H x 152 mm W x
152 mm D
(5' 0" H x 6" W x 6" D)

Description

Main Street
Non-illuminated Pylon type Street
Sign

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions) The same
message will be the opposite sides
of the post. The name always starts
at the top of the post and has
been rotated clockwise from the
horizontal to vertical. The following
are some standard abbreviations:
Boulevard - BLVD; Circle - CIR;
Court - CT; Drive - DR; Avenue -
AVE; Lane - LN; Place - PL; Road
- RD; Street - ST; Terrace - TERR.

Graphic Process
Surface applied white reflective
vinyl.

Colors Message Layout

Post: Refer to color chart.

Typography Main Street

Helvetica Bold Condensed

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign. Locate as close to intersection
as possible.

12/2012 Page 4-7-59

 EN-11.03 Exterior Signs
Pylon Street Sign

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 4-7-60

 EN-14 Exterior Signs
Building Entrance Door Identification
Size
Sign Characters: See layout

Overall Sign Height:

1650 mm (5' 6")

Description
Non-illuminated, applied vinyl letter
identification sign with messages
directed specifically to pedestrians.
The sign can also be used to
identify buildings.
Baltimore
Message Configuration VA Medical Center
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message size and layout should Building 16

adjust to the volume of information Main Entrance
being presented. Smaller text than
shown should not be used as the These doors are locked from 6 p.m. to 6 a.m.
When doors are locked, use Ambulance Entrance
messages will be unreadable. Larger
text than shown will result in words
that may not fit on the sign.

Graphic Process Smoking is only

First surface applied white reflective permitted outside in
vinyl. designated areas.

Colors
Text: White
Do not use colored vinyl.

Recommendations
Position sign so pedestrians have
a clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ
1676 mm (5'-6")

1676 mm (5'-6")
1676 mm (5'-6")

Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-61

 EN-14 Exterior Signs
Building Entrance Door Identification

Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 4-7-62

 Specification Exterior Signs

The specifications for signs are available in the Master Construction Specifications
(PG-18-1) area of the VA Technical Information Library, which is available on the VA
web site under Office of Construction & Facilities Management.

www.cfm.va.gov/til/

Refer to Signage in the specifications, Division 10, Section 10 14 00.

For more information regarding specifications, contact the Office of Construction &
Facilities Management, Facility Standards Service.

The specifications require close coordination, taking into account the existing sign
program at a medical center, any sign demolition, sign maintenance and future
signing needs.

When preparing the specifications for a project, it will require editing to add and
indicate new signs or eliminate signs that are not needed. Also, it will be necessary
to adapt the specifications to project requirements required for the specific project in
which they are intended.

The sign message schedule is considered a part of the specifications and would
comprise a portion of the spec section. The configuration and format of the mes-
sage schedule may vary according to individual project requirements. The sign
message schedule format is shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide. It provides the method for identifying each sign location,
type and message along with other notations. The sign schedule contains important
information that the sign manufacturer and the sign installer will require for manu-
facturing and sign installation.

The sign message schedule must be coordinated with a sign location plan drawing
showing where signs are to be placed within a building or on the site. Refer to the
sign location plan example shown in the Need a Sign Program section of the VA
Signage Design Guide.

For convenience, the sign type drawings can also be included in the specifications
as it own section.

12/2012 Page 4-8-1

This page is intentionally left blank
 Construction Exterior Signs

The type of exterior sign and sign system selected for a particular application or
facility, requires several decisions and involves different construction and compo-
nents to satisfy the desired requirements. This section provides an overview of the
intended criteria for exterior signs.

The details, showing the construction of the monument signs, post and panel signs,
wall mounted signs, and the stacking bar signs, are based on a concept of an
aluminum extrusion component system. Many sign manufacturers currently market
extrusions and component systems that will accomplish the illustrated objectives
of a exterior sign system. These extruded, molded, and fabricated components are
acceptable so long as the illustrated and stated specifications are adhered to. Once
a particular manufacturer’s system is selected for a sign program, ongoing main-
tenance and replacement signs will need to come from that same manufacturer’s
component system.

The illustrations are intended to show the desired configuration and intent of the
various sign types. Sections of the extrusions are for illustration purposes and have
not been engineered or configured for extruding and do not represent a finished
form or a particular manufacturer. Many manufacturers’ extrusion systems will
accomplish the illustrated objectives of the intended exterior sign system.

Creating a custom look for signs, with various shapes of posts and cabinets, is an
option that can create a specific look for a campus and can create a visual theme
that can be tied to the geographic region, neighborhood or architecture of the build-
ings. Once shapes are selected, it should become the standard for the entire medi-
cal center campus. Different shapes being used on the same campus will create a
disorganized appearance to the sign program.

In the following pages, further discussion of shape and sign design is discussed
along with examples.

Internally illuminated signs should have the electrical supply coordinated, and volt-
age confirmed, before a sign is ordered and fabricated. Illuminated signs should
contain a “UL” sticker that their construction conforms to UL Standard 48. Text for
illuminated signs should also be confirmed and finalized before the sign is ordered
and fabricated because revisions after fabracation, are very expensive and time
consuming.

Community reaction should be taken into account before large “skyline letters” are
installed on top of a medical center. Various communities have standards that may
not permit these types of signs and installing them could create a local controversy.
Also, when large letters are planned for a building, coordination should take place
to ensure issues of building skin integrity, structural loads, installation, electrical
service and maintenance access are evaluated.

Monument signs larger than those shown in the Guide may also create local com-
munity reaction. Check with the Planning Department of the local City or County
to see if they have a sign ordinance that may have guidelines for the type of sign
being proposed. Federal facilities are not required to obtain local sign permits, but
respecting the local ordinances will prevent possible controversy.

Particular care should be taken to ensure that sign footings and foundations are
correctly matched to the type of sign being installed.

12/2012 Page 4-9-1

 Construction Exterior Signs
Design Options
Detail 1 Posts: The illustration shows different post shape forms that can allow a sign pro-
gram to bring an image to a medical center campus. These forms can also create a
coordinated look with the architectural theme of buildings on a medical center cam-
pus. Additional post shapes are available and a sign designer can develop concepts
to illustrate various looks that incorporate different post structures that will work with
various cabinet designs.

Post: P1 Post: P2 Post: P3

Detail 2 Post Caps: Post caps (finials) can be used to create a theme or feeling enhanc-
ing a signs look. The caps can be round or pointed or even a decorative element
that is associated with the medical center’s architecture. There are companies
that manufacture finials and can be consulted of available options or even custom
applications.

12/2012 Page 4-9-2

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 3 Revels: The look of a component extrusion based exterior sign program allows for
signs to be assembled and installed with or without a revels. The extruded alumi-
num posts have the capability for interlocking with a reveal extrusion that allows for
the sign to have a large reveal, small reveal or no reveal. This reveal can also be
used to incorporate an accent color into the sign program.

Detail 4 Look of the Sign: By incorporating various simple enhancements to a sign a look
can be created that can be specific to a site or campus. Changing the post shape,
incorporating a reveal, having the posts and cabinet in two different colors, or hav-
ing an accent color in the reveal are all things that will give a sign a distinct look,
but not add to its costs. Using dimensional letters can also provide a more upscale
appearance for signs that identify buildings. Adding shape to the sign cabinet and a
distinct treatment to the top of the posts, adds cost to the sign, but these details can
“de-institutionalize” a sign program and allow it have a “personality” that aligns with
a hospitals architecture or a campus theme.

Plan View

Change Post
Add dimensional
letters

Add reveal

Basic Post & Panel Sign Modified Post & Panel Sign

Add post cap

Modify panel

Modified Post & Panel Sign

12/2012 Page 4-9-3

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 5
Sign Cabinet Shapes and Forms

This illustrates several examples of

expanding the design of the exterior
sign to incorporate different post,
cap, reveals and cabinet shapes.

Detail 6
Internally Illuminated Monument
Sign

This sign is constructed with an

illuminated double faced sign cabinet
mounted to a masonry base with
a reveal between the base and the
cabinet.

Sign face is aluminum with “routed

out” graphics backed with a
translucent diffuser.

Illumination is by internal fluorescent

lamping 225 mm (9") on center.

Sign face is held within a hinged/

removable frame which will allow for
replacement of the sign face without
disassembly or abandonment of
entire sign.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.

12/2012 Page 4-9-4

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 7
Internally Illuminated
Post & Panel Sign

This sign is constructed with an

illuminated double faced sign cabinet
mounted to extruded aluminum
posts with an adjustable reveal
between the posts and the cabinet.

Sign face is aluminum with “routed

out” graphics backed with a
translucent diffuser.

Illumination is by internal fluorescent

lamping 225 mm (9") on center.

Sign face is held within a hinged/

removable frame which will allow for
replacement of the sign face without
disassembly or abandonment of
entire sign.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.

Detail 8
LED’s attached to removable
LED Internally Illuminated
white aluminum panel
Sign Cabinet

Current trends are to replace

fluorescent lamping with LED
lighting. The initial cost for LED’s
will cause the sign to be slightly
more expense, but over the life of
the sign there will be considerable
savings realized. The saving come in
the form of lower energy costs and
considerably less maintenance.

There are several systems and

methods of installing LED lights in
sign cabinets and all will work, but
check with the sign company to make
sure the system the are using will
not result in pin prick hot light spots
that will be visible through the sign’s
diffuser.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.

12/2012 Page 4-9-5

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 9
Internally Illuminated
Wall Mounted Sign

This sign is constructed with a single

faced illuminated sign cabinet that
can be mounted to a wall. A complete
enclosed back is required.

Sign face is aluminum with “routed

out” graphics backed with a
translucent diffuser.

Illumination is by internal fluorescent

lamping 225 mm (9") on center.

Sign face is held within a hinged/

removable frame which will allow for
replacement of the sign face without
disassembly or abandonment of
entire sign.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.

Detail 10
Internally Illuminated Sign
Electrical

Electrical connections to illuminated

signs are to be made in a junction box
that is located adjacent to the sign.
Junction boxes are not to be installed
on the sides of cabinets or mounted
on posts.

Exposed conduit is not to be

mounted to the exterior of sign
cabinets or posts.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.
Electrical junction box
Shut off switch
Electrical feed inside post

12/2012 Page 4-9-6

 Exterior Signs

Detail 11 2 mm (.090") Aluminum Sign

Internally Illuminated Face With Routed Out Copy
Routed-out Graphics Compression Washer

Illuminated signs with routed out Aluminum Stud

aluminum sign faces require white Welded To Back
translucent diffusers. Of Sign Face

Translucent White Acrylic Backing

The translucent acrylic or
Plate. Stud Mount Acrylic With
polycarbonate diffusers are to be Slotted Holes To Allow For
mechanically fastened to the sign Expansion
face.

Letter voids of all upper case letters

“A B D O P Q R” and all lower case Stud Mount Aluminum
letters “a b d o p q r a b d e g o p q” Letter Voids
and number voids “4 6 8 9 0” are to
be mechanically fastened to the
diffuser.
Aluminum "Z" Clips
Welded To Back Of
Diffusers are not to be installed on Sign Face
a sign face using any type of tape
or adhesive system.

Detail 12
Internally Illuminated
4 Sided Monument Sign

This sign is constructed with an Sign Cabinet

illuminated 4 faced sign cabinet
mounted to a masonry base with Equal
a reveal between the base and the
cabinet.

Sign face is aluminum with “routed Satin Clear

Anodized Aluminum
out” graphics backed with a
translucent diffuser.
Masonry (Concrete,
Illumination is by internal metal Stone, Brick, Etc.)
halide lamping placed horizontally Footing. Color & Finish
on center. to Match Buildings
Equal
Sign face is held within a hinged/
removable frame which will allow for
replacement of the sign face without
disassembly or abandonment of
entire sign.

Sign is to be constructed to conform

to UL requirements.

Vertical Section Horizontal Section

Internal View

12/2012 Page 4-9-7

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 13
Non-illuminated Post & Panel Sign

This sign is constructed with a non-

illuminated sign cabinet mounted
to extruded aluminum posts with an
adjustable reveal between the posts
and the cabinet.

The sign cabinet extrusion should

have the capability to hold the sign
faces and allow for the removal and
replacement of faces without total
en
sign disassembly or abandonment of
the sign.
cy
tra
nc
gy e

Detail 14
Non-illuminated Post & Stacking
Bar Sign

This sign is constructed with a series

of aluminum tubes mounted to
extruded aluminum posts with an
adjustable reveal between the posts
and the stacking tubes.

Tubes are to be flush and touching

with no gaps between them.
nc
e
Sign is constructed in a manner that
will allow the removal or addition of
faces at a future time.

en
cy

12/2012 Page 4-9-8

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 15
Internally Illuminated Strip Sign

A stacking strip illuminated sign

incorporates individual extruded
aluminum strips that enable the
panels to be removed and rearranged
as necessary.

The sign is constructed similar to the

internally illuminated monument or
post and panel sign.

The graphics on the strips are

constructed in the same manner as
an internally illuminated sign face.

Detail 16
Internally Illuminated
Changeable Strips

Modular illuminated sign strip

extrusions are to be interlocking in
such a manner as to prevent light
leaks and also provide flexibility for
replacement and rearrangement.

nc
e
en
cy

12/2012 Page 4-9-9

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 17
Exterior Sign Utilizing Component
Assembly

The illustration shows how a sign

is assembled which is constructed
using an aluminum extrusion
system of component parts. Several
manufacturers build signs in this
manner and this approach allows
for simplified manufacturing and a
consistent appearing product.

Detail 18
The exploded view illustration
shows how an exterior component
based sign can be installed to allow
for simple future modifications or
updating.
age
e ss
M

12/2012 Page 4-9-10

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 19
Basic aluminum post and panel
sign.

Detail 20
The simplest form of a post and
panel sign.

While this basic sign is functional and

inexpensive, it is critical the the sign
face be a thick aluminum panel that
will bend or twist.

12/2012 Page 4-9-11

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 23
Fluorescent light assembly

The drawings illustrate the use of

fluorescent lamping for illuminated
Fluorescent
signs. light fixtures
9" on center
Vertical or horizontal lamp
arrangements are usually selected
based upon the sign cabinet size
and shape. Typically common size
of bulbs are used that fit the shape
and enable even placement of tubes. 9"
Normal bulb spacing is approximately
9” on center. 9"

9"

9"
9"
9"
9"
9"

Fluorescent
light fixtures 9"
on center

12/2012 Page 4-9-12

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 24
Non-illuminated Wall Mounted Sign

This sign is constructed with an

aluminum panel mounted into an St
extruded aluminum frame configured
for wall mounting. ree
Sign face is held within a frame
which will allow for replacement of tN
the sign face without disassembly or
abandonment of entire sign. am
m e
N a
e t
St re

Detail 25
Single Post & Panel Sign

Aluminum sign panel mounted to a

square aluminum post with tamper
proof mechanical fasteners.

Sign panels have the corners eased

with a 6 mm (0.25") radius. The post
shall have a permanent top cap.

12/2012 Page 4-9-13

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 26
Traffic sign mounted
to a round post

Welded
Joints

Detail 27
Street Identification Sign

Cast or fabricated aluminum post cap

configured to hold aluminum name

St
panel.

ree
For double bladed signs there
is a cast or fabricated aluminum

tN
connector that is mounted to the
lower blade and holds the upper
blade.

am
m e
N a
e t
St re

12/2012 Page 4-9-14

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 28
Mounting: Letters spaced off wall to aid water drainage
Face Illuminated
Face Illuminated Letters
letters Internal Illumination with LED’s Trimcap paint to match letter return, attach with
Face Illumination with LED’s non-corrosive fasteners
Installation of these letters should
Installationbe
of these letters
done only by should be
a licensed Fasteners as required by the local jurisdiction
done only by a licensed
electrical signelectrical
company. sign
company. Low voltage white LED’s adhere to letter back with
Consult with a local electrical double-sided adhesive tape and silicone
sign
Consult with company
a local regarding the wall
electrical
surface,
sign company accessibility
regarding and method
the wall
of installation. Translucent white acrylic face to match sign-white.
surface, accessibility and method of
installation. LED General Guidlines
Pass-thru. Seal with exterior grade silicone
LED’s to be UL recognized and carry the
UL label. Power supply contained in metal inclosure.
Power supply may be located remotely
LED GENERAL GUIDE
Rated life of LED ‘sLINES
to exceed
40,000 hours.
Fabricated aluminum channel letter. Inside of letter
LED’s to be Color
UL recognized andto 6500k
temp to match 5000k to be painted high-reflecive white
carry the UL label
Low voltage 12v system
Weep holes in bottoms of letters, baffle over holes
Rated life of LED’s to exceed
40,000 hours Listed disconnect switch in primary to be within sight of sign
max 12.25m (40 ft.). Electrical to box and final hook-up
by electrician
Color temp to match 5000k to 6500k
Primary electrical source
Low voltage 12v system
SECTION DETAIL

Detail 29
Halo Illuminated
Letters
Halo Illumination with LED’s

Installation Mounting:
of these letters should be Letters spaced off wall minimum
done only by a licensed electrical sign
Halo Illuminated Letters
company.
Internal Illumination with LED’s Non-corrosive fasteners

Consult with a local electrical

sign companyInstallation
regardingof these letters should
the wall
be done only by a licensed Fasteners as required by the local jurisdiction
surface, accessibility and method of
electrical sign company.
installation.
Low voltage white LED’s adhered to clear polycarbonate
Consult with a local electrical back with double-sided adhesive tape and silicone
Low voltagesign
12vcompany
system regarding the wall
surface, accessibility and method
of installation. 3/16” clear polycarbonate back

1/2” diameter pass-thru. Seal with exterior grade silicone

Power supply contained in metal inclosure. Power supply may

be located remotely

Fabricated aluminum reverse channel letter. Inside of letter

to be painted high-reflecive white
LED Guidelines
Weep holes in bottoms of letters, baffle over holes
LED’s to be UL recognized and
carry the UL label Listed disconnect switch in primary to be within sight of sign
max 12.25m (40 ft.). Electrical to box and final hook-up by electrician
Rated life of LED’s to exceed
40,000 hours Primary electrical source

Color temp to match 5000k to 6500k

SECTION DETAIL

12/2012 Page 4-9-15

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 30
Illuminated Letters & Logo Fasteners as required by the local jurisdiction
Non-corrosive fasteners
Fabricated metal letters and logo are
intended for use on exterior building Tube support
applications.
Fabricated aluminum reverse channel letters
These letters are custom fabricated
to meet the size, illumination and Seal all penetrations to comply with applicable
mounting requirements for the building code requirements
intended location on a building.
White Neon tubing with spacing maintained
Clear access is required to backs
per spacing table
of the letters to allow installation
of electrical connections and for Electrode and wire covers for U/L installations
maintenance.
Clear polycarbonate back
Consult with a local exterior electrical
sign company regarding these letters, Metal pass thru in wall with conduit to remote
their construction and installation U/L listed ground fault transformer & to other letters
requirements before ordering Accessible grounded transformer enclosure suitable
illuminated letters. for damp, wet or outdoor locations unless marked for
dry indoor locations only. Mounted as required by
local jurisdiction
Non-corrosive standoffs
Listed flex (metal shown) and listed GTO cable
Listed disconnect switch in primary to be within sight,
max 12.25m (40ft.) of sign (electrical to box and final
hook-up by electrician)

Primary electrical source

SPACING TABLE

A. Between insulated high voltage and 1)primary wiring and 2)dead

metal where dead metal parallels high voltage wiring for more then
25mm(1") in length.

B. Between neon tubing and nearest surface.

C. Between uninsulated high voltage parts and 1) dead metal and

2) insulated high voltage or supply conductors.

D. Between uninsulated high voltage parts and 1) other uninsulated

high voltage parts and 2) uninsulated supply and low voltage parts.

Voltage A B C D

1001 to 5000 13 mm (1/2") 6 mm (1/4") 19 mm (3/4") 25 mm (1")

1 1
5001 to 10000 19 mm (3/4") 6 mm (1/4") 29 mm (1 ")
/
8 38 mm (1 /2")
1
10001 to 15000 25 mm (1") 6 mm (1/4") 38 mm (1 ")
/
2 54 mm (2")

12/2012 Page 4-9-16

 Construction Exterior Signs

Detail 31
Fabricated Metal Letter & Logo

Fabricated metal letters and logo are Stainless steel mounting clip
intended for use on exterior building and fasteners 2 mm (0.080") min.
applications.
Non-illuminated
These letters would be typically
fabricated aluminum
custom fabricated relative to the
letter.
placement position on a building.

2 mm (0.090") min.

Per structural engineering requirements,

mechanically fasten to wall, minimum
3 connections per letter.

Weep hole

Electrical
Raceway

12/2012 Page 4-9-17

This page is intentionally left blank
 Installation Exterior Signs

The installation of exterior signs requires coordination of several criteria. Careful

consideration should be given to the following:
Criteria • Character and configuration of the roadway system.
• Desired path of travel on the roadway system for visitors, staff and deliveries.
• Location of buildings on the facility campus in relation to roads, parking, and
walkways.
• Location of building entrances.
• Weather such as wind and snow.
• Utilities and landscaping.
• Adequate light on and around directional signs.
• Placement of signs in locations where people are expecting them to be.

Visibility These elements help establish the basis of a clear sign program.
Exterior signs function to communicate to both drivers and pedestrians and their
placements need to be planned relative to the intended viewer. Sign visibility to the
user is the principal objective and is the basis of correct sign placement.

Readability Signs that are to be read from a car moving down a road need to be installed in
locations that provide for clear readability without obstructions.
Equally important is the installation of signs, taking into account the potential effects
on drivers. Signs with too much information can cause a driver to stop or slow to a
very low speed, thus creating a traffic hazard.

Coordination Coordination needs to take place with things like irrigation systems, electrical
service and other underground utilities.
Climate Every site has different climate conditions that effect an exterior sign program. Wind
load on signs effects the footing requirements. Considerations for snowfall and frost
line will also have an impact on post length and footing depth.
Footing Within this installation section of the guide there is a table to provide assistance
in determining the size of a footing for various signs. This is a general guide and
structural engineering maybe required to adequately confirm that a particular
footing will be adequate for a sign in the required conditions, at site or sign location.

Engineering Structural engineering should be consulted to ensure building walls can adequately
support large “skyline letters and logo” before having them fabricated. Monument
signs should also have their bases designed by a structural engineer to ensure the
signs can withstand wind loads in the signs location.

Mounting Sign mounting methods have been standardized to create visual uniformity for
all signs placed around a facility. Mounting heights and locations have been
determined for ease of reading.
There are two principal methods of mounting signs. These are:
• Ground Mounted: Placing a sign panel on one or more posts fixed in the
ground or sign cabinets mounted to masonry or concrete bases.
• Wall Mounted: Placing a sign on a vertical surface such as the wall or
door of a building or fence.
Viewing Each type of sign utilizes a mounting method appropriate to the viewing
requirements.
During the course of installation, always ensure that the signs are positioned with a
clear line-of-sight from the viewing point to the sign face.
Planning A sign program for a campus that works well is one that has been planned as an
integrated whole. All the way from the main identification sign, directional signs,
building and building entrance identification through to the parking lot signs. Proper
placement is part of a well-planned program.

12/2012 Page 4-10-1

 Installation Exterior Signs

Placement:
Ground Mounted Signs
All signs should be located a
600 mm
minimum of 600 mm (2'-0") from
(2'-0") Min.
the curb. The exact location of a
sign will vary depending on the
type of sign and site conditions.

Sign placement must be carefully

considered to ensure that the
sign fits the location without major
regrading. It may be necessary to
clear some shrubs or bushes or
relocate an obstruction.

When ground mounted signs on

two posts are placed on sloping
or inclined grades, adjustments
must be made to the post lengths.
Extreme differences between post
lengths should be minimized.
Curb

600 mm
(2'-0") Min.

Curb
(1'-6") Min
450 mm

1200 mm (4'-0") Max

12/2012 Page 4-10-2

 Installation Exterior Signs

Placement:
Wall Mounted Signs
Signs are placed to alert and inform MOUNTING 3000 mm
in sufficient time to avoid a hazard HEIGHT (10'-0")
or take appropriate action. They 2700 mm
should be sized for easy reading (9'-0")
from the viewing distance required. 2400 mm
(8'-0")
A sign that is too small will be lost. 2100 mm
Conversely, an overly large sign (7'-0")
can overwhelm an area. 1800 mm
(6'-0")
Signs should be placed where they 1500 mm
will not create distractions. Care (5'-0")
should be taken to avoid grouping 1200 mm
too many signs together in one (4'-0")
location.

Small sign panels placed for close

viewing are appropriately placed
at eye level. Larger signs posted
in big spaces or for viewing at
greater distances should be placed VIEWING DISTANCES TO VIEWING DISTANCES TO
proportionally higher. 9 M (30'-0") 18 M (60'-0")

Signs should not be placed where

objects may obscure them.

Before ordering a sign, place a

cardboard panel in the proposed
location to verify the size and
placement location.

CL
(4") Min.
100 mm

100 mm (4") Min.

900 mm (3'-0") Min.

12/2012 Page 4-10-3

 Installation Exterior Signs

Placement:
Parking Stall

300 mm
Center Sign on Curb & Walk
Identification Parking Stall

(12")
This illustration indicates the
location of single post & panel
signs in relationship to both
handicapped and standard parking
stalls.

Signs should be visually centered

to the driver/vehicle at the head of
the stall.

Make sure that the sign post

cannot be struck by the bumper of
a vehicle.

If an area of parking stalls are

being signed with the same
message, the number of signs can 900 mm Center Sign on Curb &
be reduced. A single sign can be (3'-0") Parking Stall Landscaping
used to label multiple stalls. A good
guide is 1 sign for every 2 or 3
stalls. One sign for 4 stalls will not
work because the sign will be to far
from a drivers vision.

For handicapped parking stalls it

is best to provide a sign for each
individual stall and then there is no
opportunity for confusion.

Center Sign on Curb & Walk

300 mm

Parking Stall
(12")

Curb &
Center Sign on
900 mm

Landscaping
Parking Stall
(3'-0")

12/2012 Page 4-10-4

 Installation Exterior Signs

Placement:
Sight Triangle at
Intersections and
Driveways
Sign

For safety reasons, signs should

7500 mm (25'-0")
not be placed in the sight triangle
(shaded area) where they could
obscure a driver’s vision. Also,
make sure that a sign’s location Traffic
is not blocking a drivers vision of Regulatory Sign
pedestrians.

Ensuring that there are no signs

in the sight triangle applies to
roadway intersections as well as 7500 mm (25'-0")
driveways.
No sign to be installed
Traffic regulatory signs are an in this area except traffic
exception to this rule. Traffic regulatory signs
regulatory signs such as STOP and
YIELD signs should be placed at
the point at which compliance is to
be made.

Footing:
Size Configurations 3 13
4 38 44 50
90
19 8 9 16 60
45
1 45 38 45
Footing depth requirements vary 3 45
26
23 75 38
68
60
83
45 75 60 68
75
60
10 30
from location to location and size 60 83 60
45 60 68
66 68
16 89 11 53 75 105 51 45 38 11
of sign. 16
75 64
60 60 45 45
38
31
60 19 30 51 90 44 45 53
15
60 60 68 11 30 25
1 8 33 19 50
56 30 15 53 38
A large sign requires a larger 3 8 8
26 8 38
20
23
68
60 31 44 53 50 53 19
30 23 31
diameter and deeper footing or 4 5
8 15
8
45 38
44 3853 13
8 18 43 25
base to withstand higher wind 3 23
25 28 30 45 60 38
68 19
8
3 21 30
loads. Poor soil compaction will 6
1 46 16
23
20 23 38 75 31
3 15 26 25 4
also require larger footings. 1 1 18
26
8 15 19
13
13 38
8 6 23
34 8 15 13 8
The depth of winter frost 3
25
penetration also effects the size of 9 8
1
3
1 4 25 30 26 21
footing required. 19 8
4 16 8
1 45 23 5 11 4 4
Locate your area of the country on 15 13
4
the map and then refer to the chart 3
5
3 10

to determine the size of footings 1

required for the various sizes of 1
signs.

It is recommended for Sign Types

EI-01.01, EI-01.02, EI-01.04 and EI-
01.05, the sign base be designed
by a licensed structural engineer
providing “sealed and signed”
drawings. This is to ensure that the
base will structurally support the
sign taking into account wind loads,
the type of soil, and winter frost
penetration.

12/2012 Page 4-10-5

 2 1800 mm 1500 mm 2.7 sq M 2550 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

Installation Exterior Signs

Footing Configuration
Chart
0"-30" Frost Depth 30"-36" Frost Depth 36"-48" Frost Depth

Sign Sign Sign Overall Footing Footing Footing

Number Panel Panel Panel Sign Cross Footing Cross Footing Cross Footing
Of Posts Height Width Sq. Ft. Height Section Depth Section Depth Section Depth

1 1'-6" 1'-0" 1.5 sq ft 6'-0" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
1 2'-0" 1'-6" 3 sq ft 6'-0" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
1 2'-6" 2'-0" 5 sq ft 6'-0" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"

2 2'-0" 2'-0" 4 sq ft 5'-0" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"

2 2'-0" 3'-0" 6 sq ft 5'-0" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 3'-0" 3'-0" 9 sq ft 5'-6" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 3'-0" 4'-0" 12 sq ft 5'-6" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 4'-0" 3'-0" 12 sq ft 6'-6" 1'-6" 2'-6" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 4'-0" 6'-0" 24 sq ft 6'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 4'-0" 6'-0" 24 sq ft 6'-6" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 3'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 4'-0" 8'-0" 32 sq ft 6'-6" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"
2 6'-0" 5'-0" 30 sq ft 8'-6" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0" 1'-6" 4'-0"

Footing:
Metric Size
Configurations 0-762 Frost Depth 762-915 Frost Depth 915-1220 Frost Depth

Sign Sign Sign Overall Footing Footing Footing

Number Panel Panel Panel Sign Cross Footing Cross Footing Cross Footing
Of Posts Height Width Sq. M Height Section Depth Section Depth Section Depth

1 450 mm 300 mm .1 sq M 1800 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

1 600 mm 450 mm .2 sq M 1800 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

1 750 mm 600 mm .5 sq M 1800 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 600 mm 600 mm .4 sq M 1500 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 600 mm 900 mm .5 sq M 1500 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 900 mm 900 mm .8 sq M 1650 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 900 mm 1200 mm 1.1 sq M 1650 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 1200 mm 900 mm 1.1 sq M 1950 mm 450 mm 750 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 1200 mm 1800 mm 2.2 sq M 1800 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 1200 mm 1800 mm 2.2 sq M 1950 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 900 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 1200 mm 2400 mm 2.9 sq M 1950 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

2 1800 mm 1500 mm 2.7 sq M 2550 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm 450 mm 1200 mm

12/2012 Page 4-10-6

0"-30" Frost Depth 30"-36" Frost Depth 36"-48" Frost Depth

 Installation Exterior Signs

Footing:
Post & Panel Signs Style 1
All footings must meet width In landscaped areas, footing shall be
and depth requirements to boxed so as to extend 90mm (3 1/2")
accommodate height and size of above grade with 50mm (2") bevel. Sign Post
sign, soil conditions, wind loads Replace surrounding
landscaping to original condition.
and winter ground freezing.

50 mm
Style 1

90 mm
(31/2")

(2")
Permanent installation in
landscaped areas.

Signs installed in grass can

have the raised concrete collars
extended to cover the area
between posts. Apply protective coating to On illuminated signs, the electrical
aluminum post in concrete conduit runs inside the sign post,
Style 2 to prevent corrosion thru footing to the junction box
Permanent installation in paved Min concrete pier footing 450 mm (1'-6") Dia.
areas. Either core drill or surface 75 mm - 100 mm (3"-4") x 750 mm (2'-6") deep to be adjusted to be
Drain Rock larger if required by structural engineering
mount.
wind load calculations

Style 2
Core Drill
Sign Post
In sidewalk areas, core drill or
saw cut pier hole, fill flush and
match material, color and finish
on top surface of concrete pier.

On illuminated signs, the electrical

conduit runs inside the sign post,
Apply protective coating to thru footing to the junction box
aluminum post in concrete
to prevent corrosion
Min concrete pier footing 450 mm (1'-6") Dia.
75 mm - 100 mm (3"-4") x 750 mm (2'-6") deep to be adjusted to be
Drain Rock larger if required by structural engineering
wind load calculations

Style 2
Surface Mount Sign Post

4 anchors
minimum
per sign

12/2012 Page 4-10-7

 Installation Exterior Signs

Footing:
Post & Panel Signs
Style 3
All footings must meet width
and depth requirements to Aluminum Cover
accommodate height and size of Aluminum Sign Post
sign, soil conditions, wind loads Painted to Match
and winter ground freezing. Sign Post
Welded Aluminum Base Plate With
Style 3 Full Penetration Weld On All Sides
Semi-permanent installation in

90 mm
(31/2")
landscaped areas.
Non-shrink Grout Leveling Bed
Use this type of installation when
it is known that a sign will need to Finish Grade
be removed or replaced in the near
future.

Signs installed in grass can have

the raised concrete colors extended
to cover the area between the Galvanized Rebar
posts. Anchor Bolts
Concrete Pier Footing
Style 4
Semi-permanent installation.
Drain Rock
Use this type of installation when
it a sign will need to be removed or
replaced in the near future.

Style 4 Internal
Post Support

J Bolt

Concrete
Pier Footing

Drain Rock

12/2012 Page 4-10-8

 Installation Exterior Signs

Mounting:
Non-illuminated
Letters
Metal letters that are installed on
the exterior of the building should
be done with spacers behind the
letters. This will allow for rain to run
down the building surface without Mounting
creating streaking under the letters. surface

The size and length of the studs 10 mm

are to correlate to the size of the (3/8") spacer
letter and the depth that is required
for installation on a particular
building surface.

Plaster and stucco building Stud hole

surfaces should have complete Metal letter
adhesive sealant application drilled & tapped
around the stud, where it Stainless or
penetrates the building, to prevent bronze stud
water intrusion into the building.
Cement or
Letters that are installed on wall non-shrink grout
surfaces below 2438 mm (8 feet)
should be installed flush to the wall
with no spacers and additional
adhesive applied to the back of
the letters. This will increase the
security of the letters against
vandalism or theft.

50 mm (2") Min.

Finished wall
concrete
or solid masonry

Stud hole
Cast plaque
10 mm (3/8") threaded stainless or
bronze studs screwed into solid
metal portion at back of seal.

Cement or non-shrink grout

12/2012 Page 4-10-9

 Installation Exterior Signs

Mounting:
Non-illuminated
Fabricated Metal
Letters
Fabricated metal letters that are
installed on the exterior of the Stainless steel mounting clip
building should be done with slight and fasteners 2 mm (0.080") min.
space between the letter and the
wall. This will allow for rain to run
Non-illuminated
down the building surface without
fabricated aluminum
creating streaking under the letters.
letter.
Plaster and stucco building
surfaces should have complete 2 mm (0.090") min.
adhesive sealent application
around the mounting clip, where
its fastener penetrates the building. Per structural engineering requirements,
This is to prevent water intrusion mechanically fasten to wall, minimum
into the building. 3 connections per letter.

Letters that are installed on wall

surfaces below 2438 mm (8
feet) should be installed with
tamperproof fasteners. This will
increase the security of the letters Weep hole
against vandalism or theft.

Mounting: Fasteners as required by wall surface

Illuminated Letters Non-corrosive fasteners

Electrical
Installation of these letters should Raceway
be done only by a licensed Fabricated aluminum reverse channel letters
electrical sign company. Seal all penetrations to comply with applicable
building code requirements
Consult with a local electrical
sign company regarding the wall
surface, accessibility and method
of installation.

Clear polycarbonate back

Metal pass thru in wall with conduit to remote
U/L listed ground fault transformer & to other letters
Accessible grounded transformer enclosure suitable
for damp, wet or outdoor locations unless marked for
dry indoor locations only. Mounted as required by
local jurisdiction
Non-corrosive standoffs
Listed flex (metal shown) and listed GTO cable
Listed disconnect switch in primary to be within sight,
max. 12.25m (40 ft.) of sign (electrical to box and final hook-up
by electrician)
Primary electrical source

12/2012 Page 4-10-10

 Installation Exterior Signs

Wall Mounting:
Non-Illuminated Signs

Aluminum wall panel signs shall

be fastened with a minimum of 2
mechanical fasteners.

Anchors should be provided in

the wall that are suitable for the
particular type of wall surface
where the sign is being installed.

12/2012 Page 4-10-11

 Parking
Structures

• Directional
• Floor Level
• Entrance
• Informational
• Disabled Access
• Parking Structure Identification
• Parking Stall

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Table of Contents

Section 5
Parking Structure Signs
• Planning 5-2-1 – 5-2-2
• Helpful Hints 5-3-1 – 5-3-2
• Overview 5-4-1 – 5-4-8
• Parking Structure Signs 5-5-1 – 5-5-63
• Specification 5-6-1
• Construction 5-7-1 – 5-7-3
• Installation 5-8-1 – 5-8-3

12/2012
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Planning Parking Structure Signs

Planning a Parking The development of an effective parking structure sign program requires the coordi-
Structure Sign nation of several interrelated criteria.
Program
An effective sign program must consider the following:

1. Circulation system in the parking structure.

2. How do visitors currently drive around in the parking structure?
3. Where do you want visitors to park? Where do you want staff to park?
4. What is the desired path of travel on the campus roadway system, for visitors
and staff?
5. What is the desired path of pedestrian travel from parked vehicles to building
entrances?
6. Location of building entrances on the facility campus in relation to parking.
7. Location of electricity, its availability, and voltage.
8. Adequacy of lighting on and around directional signs.
9. Placement of signs in locations where people expect signage.
These elements help establish the basis of a clear sign program that communicates
and informs in a direct and simple manner.

A parking structure sign program that works well is one that has been planned as
an integrated whole from the vehicle directional signs, pedestrian directional signs,
building, and building entrance identification, and parking exit signs.

Another important consideration is that a parking structure sign program needs to

be planned in accordance with a cohesive organized parking plan for both visitors
and staff. Visitors will need wayfinding information, whereas staff will not. In split use
parking facilities where a section will be designated as “visitor parking”and another
section will be designated as “staff parking”, only the visitor parking section will re-
quire wayfinding signage.

Types of Signs The main parking identification sign for a medical center parking structure should
be a large scale illuminated sign. Refer to the exterior sign section for illuminated
free standing signs.

Internally illuminated signs within a parking structure should be considered for

those locations where important information and directions need to be communicat-
ed at night or in low light conditions. A non-illuminated sign that is illuminated with
floodlights or a light fixture can also be used.

Non-illuminated signs with reflective letters will function well for secondary signs. It
is a good practice to make all non-illuminated exterior signs with reflective letters
and graphics that will ensure the best possibility of the sign being read.

12/2012 Page 5-2-1

 Planning Parking Structure Signs

Color Coding Options Examples of Color Coding, No Imagery

Parking structures over three
levels should consider color coding
the floor levels in different colors.
Colors should be distinctly different
from floor to floor. For example, if
floor one is blue, floor two should
be orange, floor three, green, etc.

In addition to color coding the

floors, one may also consider using
imagery to differentiate one floor
from the next. The various images
assigned to each floor should be
thematically related. For example,
one may choose trees or leaves
as a theme, where each floor is
associated with a distinctly different
looking leaf or tree image.

Imagery should consist of bold

graphics, that are easy to read and
interpret at a quick glance, such as
icons or silhouetted shapes. Sports
teams, city landmarks or other
types of local images can also be
used.

Examples of Combined Image & Color Coding

(illustrations intended to convey idea, NOT actual layout, colors or artwork)

12/2012 Page 5-2-2

 Helpful Hints Parking Structure Signs

The following are some general “Do’s and Don’ts” guidelines one can refer to when
developing a sign program: this is not intended to be a training section of the guide,
but to provide key information and suggestions that will hopefully reduce common
errors that are made when planning and programming a parking structure sign
program.

General Guidelines • Never use text smaller than 3” capital letter height when a sign is intended to be
read from a moving vehicle.
• Text intended to be read by pedestrians should be a minimum of 1-1/2” capital
letter height.
• Use text (words) which are familiar, easy to understand and comfortable to the
viewer.
• Always use the same words, names or titles throughout the sign program.
• All sign messages need to be a minimum of 24” above grade.
• When selecting a background color for the signs, select a complementary color
to the buildings on campus.
• Signs do require maintenance. Cleaning and waxing will extend the life of exte-
rior signs.

Size of Sign to Use • Always consider the landscaping surrounding a sign when determining a sign’s
size. It is important that shrubs and other plants do not hide or obscure the
sign.
• Lettering and sign panel size should be appropriate for the distance and speed
at which a sign is viewed.

Message Content • Keep sign messages brief.

• Unnecessary information on signs can confuse the viewer.
• Typically, all signs, with the exception of directional signs, should convey no
more than one concept or thought.
• Use text (words) that can be quickly read by the viewer. Use the same words
throughout the sign program.
• On directional and informational signs provide only the information necessary
to make a decision at that particular location.
• Whenever possible, messages should be presented using positive information.
• On directional signs, do not anticipate decisions that can be made later.
Unnecessary or premature information will confuse the reader.
• Messages placed on signs should be concise, preferably with no more than
seven to ten words.
• For signs to be read from a moving car, take into account the speed of the car.
At a slow speed the driver may be able to read seven or eight words. At a faster
speed they will only be able to read four or five.

12/2012 Page 5-3-1

 Helpful Hints Parking Structure Signs

Message Layout • Use upper and lower case text whenever possible. Upper and lower case text
is easier to read and can be understood faster than text in all capital letters.
• Line-spacing between two different messages should be greater than line-
spacing between lines of the same multiple-line message.
• Text should not be run right up to the edge of the sign.
• If a line text needs to be reduced in order to fit on a sign, use only commonly
recognized abbreviations, reduce the number of words or reduce the size of the
type for the entire message. DO NOT condense the type face.
• The most important message should appear as the first line text and the most
important directional information should be at the top of the sign on free stand-
ing signs. Signs mounted to the ceiling of a parking garage should have the
most important message at the bottom of the sign.

Placement of Signs • Signs should, always be perpendicular to the intended viewer.

• Position signs with a clear line of sight from the viewing point to the sign face.
• Always evaluate a sign's location at night as well as in the daylight. Lighting
conditions and visibility may change at night making a particular location
unsuitable.
• Signs should be placed in a manner that will be clearly visible to driver all times
of the year. For example, make sure that snow removal doesn't bury signs.
• Signs that receive spray from irrigation sprinklers will show staining from the
minerals in the water resulting in a poor appearance. The life of the sign will
also be considerably shortened.
• Always consider the landscaping surrounding a sign when determining a sign's
location. It is important that trees, shrubs and other plants do not obscure the
sign.
• Do not place signs in locations where people may walk into them. Don't place
signs any closer than 12" to a walkway.

12/2012 Page 5-3-2

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

This section of the VA Signage Design Guide provides guidelines for the various
types of parking structure signs necessary to sign a parking structure, regardless of
size or type of use.

The following overview illustrates the various types of signs in this section. The
individual pages on each sign type provide more specific information and detailed
layouts.

Parking Structure Sign Each sign in the program guide has been given a specific sign type number des-
Designation ignation. This designation provides a common description that can be referenced
when programming a site and ordering signs. The following explains how the sign
type designations are derived.

PS - 01.01 A
PS Designates a parking structure sign.
01 Two digit numbers identifies a particular sign type family.
.01 The two digit number following the period identifies a specific
sign within the sign family.

A The letter designates a specific sign configuration, version

and/or layout for graphics.

12/2012 Page 5-4-1

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Sign Type PS-01

Non-illuminated directional sign Elevator
Elevator Exit Stair
with vinyl lettering

PS-01.01
22" – Long ceiling hung vehicular
directional sign

PS-01.02
22" – Short ceiling hung vehicular
directional sign

PS-01.03
PS-01.01 PS-01.02
15" – Long ceiling hung vehicular
directional sign

PS-01.04 Exit Elevators Exit

15" – Short ceiling hung vehicular
directional sign

PS-01.03 PS-01.04

Sign Type PS-02 Elevator

Non-illuminated directional sign Elevator Exit Stair
with vinyl lettering

PS-02.01
22" – Long beam-mounted
vehicular directional sign

PS-02.02
22" – Short beam-mounted
vehicular directional sign

PS-02.03
15" – Long beam-mounted PS-02.01 PS-02.02
vehicular directional sign

PS-02.04
15" – Short beam-mounted Exit Elevators Exit
vehicular directional sign

PS-02.03 PS-02.04

12/2012 Page 5-4-2

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Sign Type PS-03

Wall-mounted directional

PS-03.01
Small pedestrian and vehicle Elevators

oriented sign North

PS-03.02
1 5

Level
Level
Large pedestrian and vehicle
oriented sign

PS-03.01 PS-03.02

Sign Type PS-04

Wall mounted warning sign
Watchfor
Watch for
Pedestrians
Pedestrians

Watch for
No Pedestrians
Pedestrians
on Ramp

PS-04

Sign Type PS-05

Vehicular oriented column level
marker
South

Level

5
North

5 5 5
PS-05.01
Square column marker

PS-05.02
Narrow column marker

PS-05.03
Round column marker PS-05.01 PS-05.02 PS-05.03 PS-05.04

PS-05.04
Small round column marker

12/2012 Page 5-4-3

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Sign Type PS-05.05

Blade sign mounted to light pole

Sign Type PS-06

Overhead wall-mounted

South
identification sign

5 Stairs

PS-05.05 PS-06

Sign Type PS-07

Elevator and stairwell
identification vinyls Stairs Elevator

2
Level Level

PS-07.01 2 IN CASE OF FIRE,

USE S TAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
2
Text and number

PS-07.02
Number only

PS-07.01 PS-07.02

Sign Type PS-08,

09 and 10 Exit Entrance
Entrance/occupancy signs
Clearance 7'- 0"
PS-08
10" Dimensional letters

PS-09
Clearance height "bang bar"

PS-10
Electronic lane use sign

PS-08 PS-09 PS-10

12/2012 Page 5-4-4

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

PS-11
Entrance/Exit sign

Exit Entrance
Clearance 8'-0" PS-09

PS-11

Sign Type PS-12.01

Panel informational signs

PS-12.03
Parking Stall Designation

PS-12.04
Handicapped parking stall

PS-12.05
Handicapped Parking Area

PS-12.07
Informational panel sign mounted
to wall

PS-12.03 PS-12.04

Parking
Only

PS-12.05 PS-12.07

12/2012 Page 5-4-5

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Sign Type PS-13

Electronic Stall Availability Sign

Entrance
Clearance 7'-0"

Spaces Available
LEVEL 5

LEVEL 4

LEVEL 3

LEVEL 2

LEVEL 1

PS-13

Sign Type PS-14

Exterior Building Mounted
Parking Directional/Availability Sign
P

PS-14

Sign Type PS-15

Painted Parking
Stall Identification

PS-15

12/2012 Page 5-4-6

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Parking Regulatory
See Exterior Sign Section for more Parking
detail. For
Government
Employees

Parking
Only

Informational Signs
See Interior Sign Section for
more detail. Elevator

NO
EXIT

44444
Mechanical
NO
IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
Room EXIT
USE ELEVATORS.

12/2012 Page 5-4-7

 Overview Parking Structure Signs

Painted / Vinyl
Garage Core Graphics Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator

1
See page 5-5-18 for more details.
2

LEVEL
LEVEL
Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator
Level Level Level Level

1 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS. 1 2 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS. 2

Stairs Elevator Stairs Elevator

Level Level

Stairs
Level

1
1 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
Elevator
Level

1
Stairs
Level

2
2 IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.
Elevator
Level

Painted Wayfinding
and Elevator
Area Identification Elevator Exit Stair
See page 5-5-19 for more details.

1 2 2

12/2012 Page 5-4-8

 PS-01.01 Parking Structure Signs
22" – Long Ceiling Hung Directional
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 3050 mm W
1' 10" H x 10' 0" W) Elevator Exit
Description
Non-illuminated, ceiling hung

North
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
5
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 2

message fields, 1 line of text at a
larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to 4

message fields, 2 lines of text, at a
smaller type size.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.
Message Layout A
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so visibility is not
obstructed by building support
Elevator Exit
beams. Align sign with flow of
traffic.
Message Layout B

Elevator
Stair Exit

12/2012 Page 5-5-1

 PS-01.01 Parking Structure Signs
Large Ceiling Hung Directional

3050 m m ( 10' - 0" )

EQ 2 642 m m ( 8' - 8 " ) EQ

559 m m ( 1'- 10" )

482.6 m m ( 1'- 7" )

38 m m ( 1- 1 /2 ")

152.4 mm (6") 177.8 mm (7 ")

63.5 mm (2-1/2") 50.8 mm (2 ")

EQ EQ
Message Layout A 152.4 m m ( 6" )

38 mm (1 -1 /2 ")
152.4 mm (6 ")
50.8 mm (2 ")

EQ EQ
Message Layout B 152.4 m m ( 6" )

12/2012 Page 5-5-2

 PS-01.02 Parking Structure Signs
22" – Short Ceiling Hung Directional
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 1830 mm W Elevator
(1' 10" H x 6' 0" W) Stair
Description
Non-illuminated, ceiling hung

North
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
5
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 1

message line at a larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to

2 message lines at a smaller type
size.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.
Message Layout A
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so invisibility is not
obstructed by building support
Elevator
beams. Align sign with flow of
traffic.
Message Layout B

Elevator
Stair

12/2012 Page 5-5-3

 PS-01.02 Parking Structure Signs
Small Ceiling Hung Directional

1829 m m ( 6 '-0 ")

EQ 142 2 m m ( 4 '-8 ") EQ

5 5 9 m m ( 1 '-1 0 ")
4 8 2 . 6 m m ( 1 '-7 ")

3 8 m m ( 1- 1/2")

1 5 2 .4 m m (6") 1 7 7 . 8 m m ( 7 ")
6 3 .5 m m (2 - 1/2") 5 0 . 8 m m ( 2 ")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")

Message Layout A

3 8 m m ( 1 -1 /2 ")
1 5 2 . 4 m m ( 6 ")
5 0 . 8 m m ( 2 ")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-4

 PS-01.03 Parking Structure Signs
15" – Long Ceiling Hung Directional
Size
Sign Face:
381 mm H x 3050 mm W
(1' 3" H x 10' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated, ceiling hung
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 2

message fields, 1 line of text, at a
larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to 4

message fields, 2 lines of text, at a
smaller type size.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.
Message Layout A
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Exit Elevators
Position sign so visibility is not
obstructed by building support
beams. Align sign with flow of
Message Layout B
traffic.

Elevator Exit
Stair Additional Parking

12/2012 Page 5-5-5

 PS-01.03 Parking Structure Signs
Large Ceiling Hung Directional

3050 mm (10'-0")
EQ 2642 mm (8'-8") EQ

381 mm (1'-3")
305 mm (1'-0")

38 mm (1-1/2")

152.4 mm (6")
50.8 mm (2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout A
152.4 mm (6")

32 mm (1-1/4")
101.6 mm (4")
38 mm (1-1/2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout B
152.4 mm (6")

12/2012 Page 5-5-6

 PS-01.04 Parking Structure Signs
15" – Short Ceiling Hung Directional
Size
Sign Face:
381 mm H x 1830 mm W
(1' 3" H x 6' 0" W)
Exit
Description
Non-illuminated, ceiling hung
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 1

message line at a larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to

2 message lines at a smaller type
size.

Graphic Process
Message Layout A
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.
Exit
Recommendations
Position sign so visibility is not
Message Layout B
obstructed by building support
beams. Align sign with flow of
traffic.
Exit
Additional Parking

12/2012 Page 5-5-7

 PS-01.04 Parking Structure Signs
Small Ceiling Hung Directional

1829 mm (6'-0")
EQ 1422 mm (4'-8") EQ

3 8 1 m m (1 '- 3 " )
3 0 5 m m (1 '- 0 " )

3 8 m m (1 - 1 /2 " )

1 5 2 .4 m m (6 " )
5 0 .8 m m (2 " )

EQ EQ
152. 4 m m ( 6 " )
Message Layout A

3 2 m m (1 - 1 / 4 " )
1 0 1 .6 m m (4 " )
3 8 m m (1 - 1 / 2 " )

EQ EQ
152. 4 m m ( 6 " )

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-8

 PS-02.01 Parking Structure Signs
22" – Long Beam Mounted Directional
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 3050 mm W
(1' 10" H x 10' 0" W)
Elevator Exit
Description
Non-illuminated, beam mounted
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 2

message fields, 1 line of text, at a
larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to 4

message fields, 2 lines of text, at a
smaller type size.

Graphic Process Message Layout A

Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Elevator Exit
Position sign on bottom edge of
beam/soffit and align sign with flow
of traffic.
Message Layout B

Elevator
Stair Exit

12/2012 Page 5-5-9

 PS-02.01 Parking Structure Signs
Large Beam Mounted Directional

3 0 5 0 mm (1 0 ' -0 ")
EQ 2 6 4 2 mm (8 ' -8 ") EQ

559 m m ( 1'- 10")

482.6 m m ( 1'- 7")

38 m m ( 1- 1 / 2")

1 52 . 4 m m (6 " ) 177.8 m m (7")

6 3 . 5 m m (2 - 1 / 2" ) 50.8 m m (2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout A
152.4 m m ( 6")

38 mm (1-1/ 2")
152.4 m m (6")
50.8 m m (2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout B
152.4 m m ( 6")

12/2012 Page 5-5-10

 PS-02.02 Parking Structure Signs
22" – Short Beam Mounted Directional
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 1830 mm W Elevator
(1' 10" H x 6' 0" W) Stair
Description
Non-illuminated, beam mounted
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 1

message line at a larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to

2 message lines at a smaller type
size.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.
Message Layout A
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign on bottom edge of
beam/soffit and align sign with flow
Elevator
of traffic.
Message Layout B

Elevator
Stair

12/2012 Page 5-5-11

 PS-02.02 Parking Structure Signs
Small Beam Mounted Directional

1829 mm (6'-0")
EQ 1422 mm (4'-8") EQ

559 mm (1'-10")
482.6 mm (1'-7")

38 mm (1-1/2")

152.4 mm (6") 177.8 mm (7")

63.5 mm (2-1/2") 50.8 mm (2")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")

Message Layout A

38 mm (1-1/2")
152.4 mm (6")
50.8 mm (2")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-12

 PS-02.03 Parking Structure Signs
15" – Long Beam Mounted Directional
Size
Sign Face:
381 mm H x 3050 mm W Exit Elevators
(1' 3" H x 10' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated, beam mounted
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 2

message fields, 2 lines of text, at a
larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to 4

message fields, 2 lines of text, at a
smaller type size.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl. Message Layout A

Colors

Exit
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart. Elevators
Recommendations
Position sign on bottom edge of
beam/soffit and align sign with flow
of traffic. Message Layout B

Elevator Exit
Stair Additional Parking

12/2012 Page 5-5-13

 PS-02.03 Parking Structure Signs
Large Beam Mounted Directional

3 0 5 0 m m ( 10' -0")
EQ 2 6 4 2 m m ( 8' -8") EQ

381 m m ( 1'- 3")

305 m m ( 1' -0")

38 m m ( 1 - 1/2")

152. 4 m m ( 6")
50. 8 m m ( 2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout A
152. 4 m m ( 6")

32 m m ( 1-1/ 4")
101. 6 m m ( 4")
38 m m ( 1-1/ 2")

EQ EQ
Message Layout B
152. 4 m m ( 6")

12/2012 Page 5-5-14

 PS-02.04 Parking Structure Signs
15" – Short Beam Mounted Directional
Size
Sign Face:
381 mm H x 1830 mm W Exit
(1' 3" H x 6' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated, beam mounted
sign. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them information such as the exit,
additional parking and the elevators
or stairs.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A allows for 1

message line at a larger type size.

Message layout B allows for up to

2 message lines at a smaller type
size.

Graphic Process Message Layout A

Surface applied vinyl.

Exit
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Message Layout B
Position sign on bottom edge of
beam/soffit and align sign with flow
of traffic.
Exit
Additional Parking

12/2012 Page 5-5-15

 PS-02.04 Parking Structure Signs
Small Beam Mounted Directional

1 8 2 9 mm (6'- 0")
EQ 1 4 2 2 mm (4'- 8") EQ

381 mm (1'- 3")

305 mm (1'- 0")

38 mm (1- 1/2")

1 52.4 m m (6")
50.8 m m (2")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")
Message Layout A

32 mm (1- 1/ 4")
101.6 mm (4")
38 mm (1- 1/ 2")

EQ EQ
152.4 mm (6")

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-16

 PS-03.01 Parking Structure Signs
Small Wall Mounted Level and Directional
Size
Sign Face:
915 mm H x 610 mm W
(3' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description and Use

Floor identification and directional Stairs
information specifically targeted
to pedestrians. Floor identification North
signs to be placed next to or near

1
elevators, and exits.

Level
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A is used for

directional as well as floor level
information.

Message layout B is used for floor

level identification.

Message layout C is used to

provide directional information.

Graphic Process Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
Elevators North Elevators
chart.
Stairs

2 1
Recommendations
Position sign so pedestrians have Exit
a clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.
Level

Level

12/2012 Page 5-5-17

 PS-03.01 Parking Structure Signs
Small Wall Mounted Level and Directional

61 0 m m ( 2' - 0 " ) 3 mm (1/8")

45 7 m m ( 1' - 6 " )

914 mm (3'-0")

828 mm (2'-9")

1 0 1 . 6 m m ( 4" )
25.4 mm (1") 25 . 4 m m ( 1" )

95 mm (3-3/4")
38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2")
101.6 mm (4") 6 3 .5 m m ( 2 - 1 / 2 " ) 95 mm (3-3/4")

4 0 6 .4 m m ( 1 ' - 4 " ) 4 0 6 .4 m m ( 1 ' - 4 " )

50.8 mm (2") 5 0 .8 m m ( 2 " ) 5 0 .8 m m ( 2 " )

CL CL
3 8 m m ( 1- 1/ 2" ) 7 6 m m ( 3" ) 38 mm (1-1/2") 76 mm (3")

Message Layout A Message Layout B

1 0 1 . 6 m m ( 4" )
2 5 . 4 m m ( 1" ) 25 . 4 m m ( 1" )

95 mm (3-3/4")
38 mm (1-1/2")
101.6 mm (4") 6 3 .5 m m ( 2 - 1 / 2 " )
63.5 mm (2-1/2") 1 0 1 .6 m m ( 4 " )

4 4 .5 m m ( 1 - 3 / 4 " )

1220 mm (4'-0")

CL
Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 5-5-18

 PS-03.02 Parking Structure Signs
Large Wall Mounted Level and Directional
Size
Sign Face:
1219 mm H x 813 mm W
(4' 0" H x 2' 8" W)

Description and Use Elevators

Floor identification and directional

5
information specifically targeted to
vehicular traffic. Floor identification
signs to be placed next to or near

Level
elevators, and exits.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Message layout A is used for

directional as well as floor level
information.

Message layout B is used for floor

level identification.

Message layout C is used to

provide directional information.

Graphic Process Message Layout A Message Layout B Message Layout C

Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
Elevators South Elevators

chart. Stairs

5 5
Exit
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
Level
Level

clear, unobstructed view of the

sign.

12/2012 Page 5-5-19

 PS-03.02 Parking Structure Signs
Large Wall Mounted Level and Directional

813 mm (2'-8") 3 m m (1 / 8 " )

610 mm (2'-0")

1219 mm (4'-0")

1118 mm (3'-8")

139.7 mm (5-1/2")
3 1 .8 m m ( 1 1 / 4 " ) 50.8 mm (2")

127 mm (5")
50.8 mm (2") 50.8 mm (2")
139.7 mm (5-1/2") 8 9 m m (3 - 1 / 2 " ) 127 mm (5")

482.6 mm (1'-9") 482.6 mm (1'-9")

63.5 mm (2-1/2") 63.5 mm (2-1/2")

50.8 mm (2") EQ EQ CL
101.6 mm (4") 50.8 mm (2") 101.6 mm (4")

Message Layout A Message Layout B

139.7 mm (5-1/2")
31.8 mm (1-1/4") 50.8 mm (2")

127 mm (5")
5 0 . 8 m m (2 " )
139.7 mm (5-1/2") 89 mm (3-1/2")
76 mm (3") 133.4 mm (5-1/4")

50.8 mm (2")

1220 mm (4'-0")

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 5-5-20

 PS-04.01 Parking Structure Signs
Wall Mounted Warning
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 1067 mm W
(1' 6" H x 3' 3" W)

Description and Use

Precautionary information placed
strategically to avoid traffic conflict Watchfor
Watch for
Pedestrians
Pedestrians
or accidents.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions) No Pedestrians
on Ramp

Message layout A is pedestrian

regulatory sign.

Message layout B, C, D, E and F

are used primarily for vehicular
traffic.

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl. Message Layout A Message Layout B

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart. No Pedestrians Watch for
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
on Ramp Pedestrians
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout C Message Layout D

Do Not
Merging Traffic
Enter
Message Layout E Message Layout F

EXIT One Way

12/2012 Page 5-5-21

 PS-04.01 Parking Structure Signs
Wall Mounted Warning
990 mm (3 ' -3 " ) 3 mm (1 / 8 " )
3 5 mm (1 -3 / 8 " )
CL
3 8 mm (1 -1 / 2 " )

76 mm (3")
8 2 . 5 mm (3 -1 / 4 " )
8 9 mm (3 -1 / 2 " )
457 m m (1'-6")
3 8 mm (1 -1 / 2 " )

Message Layout A & B

CL

1 2 7 mm (5 “)

3 8 mm (1 -1 / 2 " )

Message Layout C
355.6 mm (1'-2")
EQ EQ EQ
EQ
8 9 mm (3 -1 / 2 " )

1 1 4 mm (4 -1 / 2 " )
355. 6 mm (1'-2") 3 8 mm (1 -1 / 2 " )

EQ
Message Layout D

EQ 63.5 mm (2-1 / 2 " ) EQ

139. 7 mm (5-1/2")

165 m m (6-1/2") 1 9 0 . 5 mm (7 -1 / 2 " )

Message Layout E

EQ 38 m m (1 -1 / 2 " ) EQ

165 m m (6-1/2")

114 m m (4-1/2") 1 6 5 mm (6 -1 / 2 " )

Message Layout F
12/2012 Page 5-5-22
 PS-05.01 Parking Structure Signs
Square Column Marker
Size
Sign Face:
839 mm H x 559 mm W
(2' 9" H x 1' 10" W)

Description and Use

Floor level identification marker for
placement on the wide faces of the
column.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing

South
for dimensions)

5
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout A
South

5
12/2012 Page 5-5-23
 PS-05.01 Parking Structure Signs
Square Column Marker

559 mm (1'-10")
76 mm (3") 419 mm (1'-4 1/2") 3 mm (1/8")
EQ EQ

838 mm (2'-9")

762 mm (2'-6")

368.3 mm (1'-2 1/2")

57 mm (2-1/4")

EQ EQ

Message Layout A

1372 mm (4'-6")

12/2012 Page 5-5-24

 PS-05.02 Parking Structure Signs
Narrow Column Marker
Size
Sign Face:
839 mm H x 407 mm W
(2' 9" H x 1' 4" W)

Description and Use

Floor level identification marker for
placement on the faces of narrow
columns.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Level
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

5
Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout A
Level

5
12/2012 Page 5-5-25
 PS-05.02 Parking Structure Signs
Narrow Column Marker

3 5 5 . 6 mm (1 '-4 ")
76 m m ( 3" ) 2 6 6 . 7 mm (1 0 -1 /2 ") 3 mm ( 1/ 8" )
EQ EQ

838 m m ( 2' -9" )

762 m m ( 2' -6" )

2 2 9 mm (9 ")

5 7 mm (2 -1 /4 ")

EQ EQ

Message Layout A

1 3 7 2 mm (4 '-6 ")

12/2012 Page 5-5-26

 PS-05.03 Parking Structure Signs
Round Column Marker
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description and Use

Floor level identification marker for
placement on round columns.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process North

Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
5
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 5-5-27

 PS-05.03 Parking Structure Signs
Round Column Marker

610 m m ( 2 '-0") 2 mm (1/6")

CL

50. 8 mm (2")
38 mm (1-1/2")
63. 5 mm (2-1/2")

89 mm (3-1/2")

6 1 0 m m ( 2' - 0" )

266. 7 mm (10-1/2")

50. 8 mm (2")

Message Layout A

1525 mm (5'-0")

12/2012 Page 5-5-28

 PS-05.04 Parking Structure Signs
Small Round Column Marker
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 559 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 6" W)

Description and Use

Floor level identification marker for
placement on round columns.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process

5
Surface painted

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 5-5-29

 PS-05.4 Parking Structure Signs
Small Round Column Marker

454 mm (1'- 6" )

CL

EQ

4 5 4 mm ( 1 ' - 6" ) 305 mm (1'- 0" )

EQ

Message Layout A

1525 mm (5'- 0" )

12/2012 Page 5-5-30

 PS-05.05 Parking Structure Signs
Pole Mount Marker
Size
Sign Face:
839 mm H x 559 mm W
(2' 9" H x 1' 10" W)

Description

South
Floor Level identification marker for
placement on pole.
5
Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the Sign Mounted in Front and Back of Pole
sign.
South

South

South

5 5 5

Single Flag Mounted Sign Double Flag Mounted Sign

South

Message Layout A
5
12/2012 Page 5-5-31
 PS-05.05 Parking Structure Signs
Pole Mounted Marker

559 mm (1'-10")
76 mm (3") 419 mm (1'-4 1/2") 3 mm (1/8")
EQ EQ

838 mm (2'-9")

762 mm (2'-6")

368.3 mm (1'-2 1/2")

57 mm (2-1/4")

EQ EQ

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 5-5-32

 PS-06.01 Parking Structure Signs
Wall Mounted Identification
Size
Sign Face:
305 mm H x 1067 mm W
(1' 0" H x 3' 6" W)

Description and Use

Stairwell and elevator identification
sign. Stairs Elevator

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process Signtype:

Surface applied vinyl. IN-01.04
IN CASE OF FIRE,
USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Position sign so pedestrians have
a clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

Message Layout A

Elevator

12/2012 Page 5-5-33

 PS-06.01 Parking Structure Signs
Wall Mounted Identification

1069 mm (3'-6")
3 mm (1/8")
889 mm (2'-11")
CL

305 mm (1'-0")
266.7 mm (10-1/2") 127 mm (5")

76 mm (3")

Message Layout A

CL

39 mm (1-1/2")

12/2012 Page 5-5-34

 PS-07.01 Parking Structure Signs
Floor Level Identification Vinyls
Size
Sign Face:
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Description and Use

Signtype:
Floor level identification for
placement on stairwell and elevator Stairs IN-01.04 Elevator
Level Level

2 2
doors.
IN CASE OF FIRE,

Message layout A is aligned flush

USE STAIRS. DO NOT
USE ELEVATORS.

right and message layout B is

aligned flush left. Either layout can
be used to designate a stairwell or
an elevator. Text should be aligned
along the opening side of the door.
Use right aligned text on doors that
open from right to left and use left
aligned text on doors that open
from left to right.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process Message Layout A

Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.
Stairs
Level

Message Layout B
2
Elevator
Level

2
12/2012 Page 5-5-35
 PS-07.01 Parking Structure Signs
Floor Level Identification

Al i gn

89 m m (3-1/ 2")

50. 8 m m (2")

50. 8 m m (2")
25. 4 m m (1")

177. 8 m m (7" )

Message Layout A

Al i gn

8 9 m m ( 3 -1 /2 " )

5 0 .8 m m ( 2 " )

5 0 .8 m m ( 2 " )
2 5 .4 m m ( 1 " )

1 7 7 .8 m m ( 7 " )

Message Layout B

102 m m (4" )

1220 m m (4' -0")

12/2012 Page 5-5-36

 PS-07.02 Parking Structure Signs
Floor Level Identification Vinyls
Size
Sign Face:
25 mm H (1' 0" H)

Description and Use

Floor level identification for
placement inside stairwells.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
2
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: white, T2

2
Message Layout A

2
Message Layout B
LEVEL

12/2012 Page 5-5-37

 PS-07.02 Parking Structure Signs
Floor Level Identification Vinyls

305 mm (1'-0")

Message Layout A

102 mm (4")

1220 mm (4'-0")

12/2012 Page 5-5-38

 PS-08 Parking Structure Signs
Dimensional Letters
Size
254 mm H (10" H)
PS-10
Description Exit PS-08 Entrance PS-08
Individual letters to identify an
entrance or exit. Clearance 7'- 0" PS-09

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Fabricated or cut out painted
aluminum letters.

Colors
Text: Various

Message Layout A

Exit

12/2012 Page 5-5-39

 PS-08 Parking Structure Signs
Dimensional Letters

25.4 mm (1/2")
50.8 mm (1")

254 mm (10")

Message Layout A

12/2012 Page 5-5-40

 PS-09 Parking Structure Signs
Clearance Height Bang Bar
Size
Sign Face:
152 mm H x various lengths
(6" H)

Description and Use

Ceiling hung vehicular clearance
identification marker to be placed
Clearance 7'-0"
at all entrances and at grade level PS-09.01 PS-09.02
changes.

Clearance height “bang bars” are

required within a parking structure
when clearance levels change on
ramps or between floors.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: black
Background: yellow, black

Recommendations
“Bang bars” made from PVC
provide sufficient clearance
notification and will not damage
vehicles upon contact. Aluminum or
steel pipe can damage vehicles.

Message Layout A

Clearance 7'- 0"

(Lengths will vary)

NOTE: Confirm actual clearance height in the parking structure.

Mount bottom of sign to match clearance height stated on sign.

12/2012 Page 5-5-41

 PS-09 Parking Structure Signs
Clearance Height Bang Bar

Va r ia b le
3 8 m m (1 -1 / 2 ")
3 8 m m (1 -1 / 2 ") CL

EQ
8 8 .9 m m ( 3 - 1 / 2 " )
EQ

152 mm (6") Ø

Message Layout A PS-09.01

152 mm (6")

PS-09.02

12/2012 Page 5-5-42

 PS-10 Parking Structure Signs
Electronic Lane Use Sign
Size
305 mm H x 2438 mm W
(1' 0" H x 8' 0" W) Messaging changes as use changes
Description
Sign to inform status of
alternating entrance / exit lane.

Sign Components
Sign cabinet with electronic
lane use information.

Graphic Process
Electronic (LED)

Mounting
Wall or beam mounted

Installation
It is recommended that this
sign be installed above entry to
alternating entrance/exit lane.
PS-08 PS-09

Exit Entrance
Clearance 7'-0"

Clearance 7'-0"

12/2012 Page 5-5-43

 PS-10 Parking Structure Signs
Electronic Lane Use Sign

138mm (5.5")

2438 mm (8'-0")

305 mm (1'-0")

Electronic (LED) messaging changes from “Parking” to “Lane Closed”

as use of lane changes from and entrance to an exit.

Exit Entrance
Clearance 7'- 0"
-6”

Clearance 7'- 0"

12/2012 Page 5-5-44

 PS-11 Parking Structure Signs
Entrance and Exit Identification
Size
Sign Face:
559 mm H x 3050 mm W
(1' 3" H x 10' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated, free swinging
Exit Entrance
ceiling hung sign with, and without, Clearance 8’-0” PS-09
bang bar. This sign type is directed
specifically to drivers providing
them entrance identification and
information.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Sign Face:
Text: various, refer to color chart
Background: various, refer to color
chart.

Recommendations
Sign is for parking structure
entrances that are high or do not Message Layout
have a surface to mount letters or a
sign panel

Exit

12/2012 Page 5-5-45

 PS-11 Parking Structure Signs
Entrance and Exit Identification

3050 mm (10'-0")
EQ 2642 mm (8'-8") EQ 76 mm ( 3" )
CL

Va r ie s

3 81 mm (1 '-3 ")
3 0 5 mm ( 1'- 0" ) 203 mm (8")
50.8 mm (2")

S ee Sign Type
PS-09

12/2012 Page 5-5-46

 PS-12.03 Parking Structure Signs
Parking Stall Designation
Size
Sign Face: 457 mm H x 305 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height: 1829 mm

(6' 0")

Description
Non-illuminated post or wall
mounted parking identification
and informational sign. This type
of sign is for use in identifying or
controlling specific parking areas,
spaces or stalls.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

This sign with symbol or title and

the appropriate text shall be used
as shown in the adjacent examples.

Colors
Text: white
Background: refer to color chart.
Post: refer to color chart. Wall Mounted Option Post Mounted Option
Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl

Recommendations Message Layout A Message Layout B

Position sign on wall so drivers
have a clear, unobstructed view of
the sign.

When placing this type of sign

near parking places, be sure the
sign is set far enough back that
over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

Other possible Other possible

messages for this layout messages for this layout

1) Visitors Only 1) Director

2) Buses Only 2) Chief of Staff
3) Authorized Vehicles Only 3) Volunteers
4) Staff Only 4) Consultant
5) Motorcycle Parking
6) Officer of the Day
7) Outpatient Only
8) Government Vehicle
9) Police Only
10) Employee of the Month
11) Car Pool

12/2012 Page 5-5-47

 PS-12.03 Parking Structure Signs
Parking Stall Designation

Message Layout A and B Message Layout A and B

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 5-5-48

 PS-12.04 Parking Structure Signs
Handicapped Parking Stall
Size
Sign Face:
457 mm H x 305 mm W
(1' 6" H x 1' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1830 mm (6' 0")

Description
Wall mounted or single post, non-
illuminated handicapped parking
stall sign.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Symbol and text must conform to

layout as shown.

Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl.

Colors
Text: white
Background: handicap blue
Post: refer to color chart Wall Mounted Option Post Mounted Option

Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

When placing this type of sign Message Layout A Message Layout B

near parking places, be sure the
sign is set far enough back that
over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

Message Layout C

12/2012 Page 5-5-49

 PS-12.04 Parking Structure Signs
Handicapped Parking Stall

Message Layout A & C Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-50

 PS-12.05 Parking Structure Signs
Handicapped Parking Area
Size
Sign Face:
610 mm H x 610 mm W
(2' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Overall Sign Height:

1830 mm (6’ 0”)

Description
Wall mounted or single post,
non-illuminated handicapped
parking area sign. Identification of
handicapped parking areas and
directional information regarding
access. These signs can also
be used to provide direction
information to drivers to direct them
to handicapped parking that may
not be obvious.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)
Symbol is to remain constant.
Below symbol arrows, text or text
and arrows can be used.
Wall Mounted Option Post Mounted Option
Graphic Process
Surface applied reflective vinyl.

Colors
Text: white
Background: handicap blue
Post: refer to color chart
Message Layout A Message Layout B
Recommendations
Position sign so drivers have a
clear, unobstructed view of the
sign.

When placing this type of sign

near parking spaces, be sure the
sign is set far enough back that
over hanging front and rear of
automobiles do not come in contact
with the sign post.

12/2012 Page 5-5-51

 PS-12.05 Parking Structure Signs
Handicapped Parking Area

Message Layout A Message Layout A

Message Layout B

12/2012 Page 5-5-52

 PS-12.07 Parking Structure Signs
Informational Panel
Size
Sign Face:
914 mm H x 610 mm W
(3' 0" H x 2' 0" W)

Description
Non-illuminated wall panel sign. Stairs PS-06
Sign used to communicate various
informational or instructional
messages.

Message Configuration
(Refer to message layout drawing
for dimensions)

Graphic Process
Surface applied vinyl.

Colors
Text: white
Background: refer to color chart
Post: refer to color chart.

Recommendations
Position sign where message
needs to be conveyed